Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / RIV Capital

RIV Capital

riv · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker riv
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · RIV Capital
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CLIENT  
FOCUSED 
OUTCOME  
ORIENTATED

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

8

 
 
 
 
River and Mercantile Group PLC

Annual Report and Accounts 2018

River and Mercantile is a client focused, outcome 
orientated advisory and investment solutions business. 
We offer a broad range of services, from consulting 
activities including advisory to fully-delegated fiduciary 
and asset management, incorporating equities, 
derivatives and multi-asset solutions.

River and Mercantile services a client base in the UK comprising 
institutional pension schemes, wholesale financial intermediaries, 
insurance companies, state funds and charitable institutions; along 
with institutional clients in Europe, the US, Australia and New Zealand.

River and Mercantile is focused on creating investment solutions  
for its clients across its core markets:

–  UK DB pension schemes;

–  UK DC pension schemes;

–  US pensions (DB and DC);

–  Australia and New Zealand pensions;

–  Insurance;

–  Wholesale financial intermediaries; and

–  Strategic relationships.

We have a core set of beliefs:

–  We are a broad based asset management, investment solutions and 
actuarial specialist successfully interpreting the complexities of 
investment and financial liabilities;

–  We are focused on meeting our clients’ needs through highly effective 

and innovative strategies;

–  We have created an environment that attracts and motivates great 

people to serve our clients well; and

–  We work with our clients as partners to ensure their needs, and the 

potential solutions to them, are fully understood.

STRATEGIC REPORT

01  2018 highlights
02  Chairman’s statement
04  Chief Executive’s review
11 
Investment performance
12  Business model
14  The divisions
16  Operating business review
22  Case study
24  Key Performance Indicators
26  Financial review
32  Risk management
34  Principal risks and uncertainties
37  Viability statement
38  People
40  Corporate responsibility

GOVERNANCE

42  Board of Directors
44  Corporate governance report
47  Audit and Risk Committee report
50  Remuneration Committee report

FINANCIALS

62  Directors’ report
64  Directors’ responsibilities
65 
Independent auditor’s report 
69  Consolidated income statement
69  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
70  Consolidated statement of financial position
71  Consolidated statement of cash flows
72  Consolidated statement of changes in 

shareholders’ equity

73  Notes to the consolidated financial statements
93  Company statement of financial position
93  Company statement of changes in shareholders’ 

equity

94  Company statement of cash flows
95  Notes to the Company financial statements

OTHER

100  Glossary
IBC  Shareholder information and advisors

Forward looking statements
This Annual Report contains forward looking statements with respect 
to the financial condition, results and business of the Group. By their 
nature forward looking statements relate to events and circumstances 
that could occur in the future and therefore involve the risk and 
uncertainty that the Group’s actual results may differ materially from 
the results expressed or implied in the forward looking statements. 
Nothing in this Annual Report should be construed as a profit forecast.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

01

2018 HIGHLIGHTS

We continue to perform well, with 
strengthened distribution resource and 
corporate processes, a reinforced culture, 
and new strategies added to support growth.

FEE EARNING AUM/NUM

STATUTORY PROFIT AFTER TAX

£33.8BN  9%

£15.1M  13%

NET MANAGEMENT AND ADVISORY FEES

EARNINGS PER SHARE

£64.2M  15%

ADJUSTED UNDERLYING PRE-TAX MARGIN1

25%  4%

Down from 29%

PERFORMANCE FEES

£10.6M  16%

Statutory

18.8P  14%
21.9P  5%
16.1P  1%

Adjusted underlying 

Adjusted 

TOTAL DIVIDEND FOR THE YEAR2

18.6P  6%

1. Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin represents net management and advisory fees less associated remuneration, administrative 

expenses, amortisation of software, depreciation, and finance income and expense; divided by net management and advisory fees.

2. Including 5.5 pence proposed final dividend.

02

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT

PROGRESS 
MADE DURING A 
CHALLENGING YEAR

We grew our net management and advisory 
fee revenue by 15%, although stronger growth 
in the first half of the year was tempered 
somewhat by the impact on assets following 
the dismissal of a portfolio manager. We 
have also seen the impact on margin from 
regulatory changes such as MiFID II as well as 
the significant level of investment that we have 
made in infrastructure and new initiatives. As 
a result, statutory profit before tax increased 
by 13% but adjusted underlying profit before 
tax fell by 2%. We have continued our policy 
of returning a high level of our adjusted profit 
to shareholders, with total dividends this year 
declared and proposed of 18.6 pence, or 85% 
of adjusted profit (2017: 19.7 pence, 86%).

The Group has experienced a number of 
more significant events during the year:

–  First, the Competition and Markets 

Authority (CMA) published its provisional 
decisions following its extensive review into 
the investment consulting market. We 
believe that on balance the 
recommendations are positive for the 
Group, most notably those on mandatory 
tendering, fuller Financial Conduct 
Authority (FCA) regulation, and better 
performance and fee reporting;

–  Second, the FCA has continued with its 

investigation into the competition matter 
involving the Group’s subsidiary RAMAM. 
We have fully cooperated with the FCA 
during the investigation and, as already 
announced, we have been advised that the 
penalty that might be imposed on the Group 
if an infringement decision were reached, 
should not exceed £109,000; and

–  Third, as mentioned above, we took the 
decision to dismiss one of our portfolio 
managers for a breach of our conduct rules. 
This action attracted media comment and 
led to some outflows of money from funds 
with which the individual in question was 
associated. I am glad to say, however, that 
they were less overall than we had prepared 
for. This reflects a generally positive 
reaction to our taking decisive action to 
protect our culture, but also was in no small 
part due to the great efforts made by our 
senior equities team to ensure that our 
clients were fully supported during this 
period, and I am most grateful for their 
commitment. 

Jonathan Dawson
Chairman of the Board

TOTAL DIVIDENDS

18.6p

ADJUSTED PROFIT DISTRIBUTED

85%

This is the first Annual Report I 
am presenting to you since my 
appointment to the Board as 
Chairman on 1 October 2017. 

I am most grateful to Peter Warry who took 
over as acting Chairman following the death  
of Paul Bradshaw in early 2017. 

The last year has been marked by significant 
political changes, increased economic and 
market volatility, and it has certainly been a 
challenging one for investment managers. In 
the UK, the divisive political debate around 
the future relationship – economic, political, 
defence and security – between the UK 
and the rest of the EU is unresolved, with 
our own politicians seemingly incapable of 
achieving a consensus among themselves. 
Elsewhere, the risks of a possible trade war 
involving the US, Europe and China remain 
high. Discerning the outlook for 2019 is more 
than normally difficult although with such 
uncertainty has also come opportunities for 
asset managers with the products, strategies 
and approach to risk that are fit for the times.

Against that backdrop, the Group’s 
performance in the past year has been 
positive. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

03

“ I believe that the Group has  
continued to make good progress.”

We have used this experience to remind 
all our staff of the importance of keeping 
a strong culture of compliance, openness, 
adherence to our conduct rules and team 
spirit. I firmly believe that companies that 
cannot exhibit such an approach will be 
unable to survive and prosper. I equally 
believe, however, that the response to this 
incident has allowed us to reinforce the 
strengths of the Group, summed up in our 
commitment to providing the best service to 
clients that we possibly can, and upholding 
the highest levels of corporate conduct. 

Whilst the culture of a company is a broadly 
spread attribute, it has to start somewhere. 
It is the role of the Board to set the required 
tone, to demonstrate the appropriate 
behaviour, to ensure that the interests 
of our clients are our first priority and to 
continually reinforce this message. I see 
one of my principal roles as Chairman as 
being to focus on the culture of the Board 
and of the Group as a whole, and I am 
happy to report that my colleagues on the 
Board and in the senior management of the 
Group fully grasp this, and understand its 
importance and how we are performing.

There has been a risk, of which the Board was 
conscious, that the distraction from external 
events and pressures might lead to a loss 
of focus on our investment performance. 
I am pleased to say that our performance 
has remained robust in all key categories. 
We have in all but one of our strategies, 
where investment outperformance is the 
objective, been ahead of benchmarks since 
inception. Our fiduciary offering in particular, 
has returned around 10% per annum since 
its inception in 2004. This is a very good 
result and is market leading amongst 
fiduciary managers – something which 
will be of great importance as the CMA’s 
transparency changes come into force.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
A number of significant changes in our 
corporate governance have been made  
during the year. We have reconstituted 
the Audit and Risk Committee as two new 
committees, with separate committee  
chairs, responsible respectively for Audit  
and for Risk. Whilst the combined structure 
served the business well in the period since 

IPO, I consider that the disciplines of Audit 
and of Risk are different, and that addressing 
them in two separate committees will allow 
us to provide deeper levels of assurance 
and risk modelling than hitherto. 

This change represents the natural 
evolution of the management of risk and 
provides a direction of travel towards 
the implementation of the Senior 
Manager and Certification Regime.

John Misselbrook has joined the Board as 
a Non-Executive Director and as Chair of 
the Risk Committee. John has extensive 
experience in the investment industry as 
a risk and operations specialist and has 
already made a significant difference to 
the Board in this capacity. We have also 
appointed the Group’s first dedicated Chief 
Risk Officer, who joined in August 2018. 

Angela Crawford-Ingle (previously Chair 
of the Audit and Risk Committee) now 
chairs our Audit Committee and, with the 
retirement of Peter Warry last November, 
has been appointed Senior Independent 
Director. Robin Minter-Kemp continues in 
his role as Remuneration Committee Chair. 

I chair the Group’s Nominations Committee 
but, in line with best practice, I am not a 
member of the Audit, Risk or Remuneration 
Committees.

Separately, a number of changes in Executive 
responsibility have also been made amongst 
our senior team following a review by Mike 
Faulkner, our Group CEO. These changes 
are intended to sharpen client focus 
and maximise opportunities from closer 
working across the Group. Critically, the 
changes will also give Mike the opportunity 
to allocate more of his time to critical 
investment research and development.

–  First, James Barham has been appointed 

Deputy Group CEO with overall 
responsibility for our Solutions and Asset 
Management businesses, reporting to Mike. 

–  Second, Kevin Hayes has taken over 

responsibility for running our Solutions 
business, reporting to James, whist 
retaining his Board responsibilities as  
Chief Financial Officer. 

–  Third, Jack Berry has moved to a new role 
within the Group, focussing on clients with 
complex investment requirements. 

We have also looked at the overall composition 
of the Board and the numbers of Executive 
Directors and Non-Executive Directors. 
From 1 July 2019 River and Mercantile will 
no longer be exempt (as a smaller company) 
from the full requirements of the Corporate 
Governance Code on board composition 
and we will therefore need to move to a 
position where at least half of the Board, 
excluding the Chair, are independent Non-
Executive Directors. At present, apart from 
my position as Chair, we have four Executive 
Directors, three independent Non-Executive 
Directors, and one Non-Executive Director 
representing a significant shareholder who 
is therefore not considered independent. 
We will be addressing this, together with 
wider diversity improvements, during the 
year and I will report further in due course.

OUTLOOK
Overall, despite the challenges of the past 
year, I believe that the Group has continued to 
make good progress and is very well placed to 
exploit a number of exciting opportunities:

–  At home in our core business, with the 

resolution of the CMA market investigation 
in a favourable fashion for our fiduciary 
business and the demand we see for our 
derivatives offering; 

–  Overseas, with the enhancement of our 
presence in the US and Australia; and

–  In our continuing new product development 

into areas such as Global Macro (now 
launched) and Emerging Market Absolute 
Return.

The Board therefore looks to the future with 
continuing confidence.

Jonathan Dawson
Chairman of the Board

04 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW

WE CONTINUE TO PERFORM 
WELL AND DELIVER ON 
CLIENT OUTCOMES

AN OVERVIEW OF THE GROUP
River and Mercantile is focused on helping 
clients meet their specific desired investment 
outcomes, often liability-related. We believe 
this focus on clients is a cultural differentiator 
in itself. However, our ability to bring together 
macro, security selection and derivative 
skills to solve problems in an integrated 
way is something that few firms can do. 
Our view is that it is difficult to solve client 
problems well without all of these skills.

I believe we are also differentiated in the way 
we understand client needs. If the approach 
to helping clients understand their needs is 
purely technical, you get a technical answer. 
But some needs are not technical – they 
are softer, and may relate to governance, 
attitudes and beliefs. Solving a client’s needs 
effectively requires solving them all, not just 
the technical, and we are good at that.

We measure this based on delivery of client 
outcomes first and foremost, and its effect  
on client satisfaction and retention (or  
low attrition). 

For shareholders, we look at the three to 
five year performance of the business. For a 
business like ours there is always a lot going 
on in any individual year, particularly as we 
invest in new initiatives. This doesn’t change 
the fact that the direction of travel is positive. 
Finally, we are really interested in the speed 
with which our people develop, particularly 
our junior and mid-level people, as they 
are the long term future of the business. 

This client focus, and problem solving purpose 
and philosophy hasn’t changed since the 
IPO, nor is it likely to change (I certainly 
can’t see a circumstance where it would). It 
influences all decisions we take at the Board 
and as an Executive, particularly in what we 
decide not to do. A great investment idea 
will never become a product or strategy if 
it doesn’t help solve a client problem. 

Our purpose is also embedded throughout 
the Group and drives how we recruit, engage 
and reward our people (including how we 
identify Board members). Our commitment 
to our people is supported by our recruitment 
during the year of Ian Iceton, previously HR 
director at Network Rail, to take responsibility 
for all of our people-related activities. 
Incidentally, as a trustee of their pension, he 
was previously a client which illustrates and 
reinforces some of the points made earlier. 

Mike Faulkner
Chief Executive Officer

GROWTH IN NET MANAGEMENT AND 
ADVISORY FEES

15%

I would like to take a slightly 
different approach in my 
statement this year. We are 
aware of a number of questions 
that commonly arise for all 
companies from investors. 

I would therefore like to start with an overview 
of the Group that I hope addresses the most 
common questions. My hope is that this 
overview will also give readers useful context 
for the rest of my report, which will cover:

–  Progress and issues during the year to  

June 2018;

–  Market outlook; and

–  New products and research and 

development.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

05

“ We continued to deliver strongly 
to those outcomes our clients 
expect of us.”

Environmental and societal impact is an 
issue on many investors’ minds. Whilst the 
products we offer incorporate ESG to varying 
degrees, here I focus on the Group itself. 
We don’t have a significant environmental 
impact, we don’t engage in a range of 
questionable societal activities and we meet 
all of our tax obligations. So the ‘cost’ to 
society of how we do what we do is, to all 
intents and purposes, negligible to zero. 
Therefore the real issue in terms of our 
positive or negative impact is in the effect 
of what we do, rather than how we do it.

In general, as long as we are meeting or 
exceeding our client outcomes, I would argue 
our effect on society is positive. Given the 
majority of what we do relates to members 
of pension schemes (or individual investors 
who are clients of wholesale firms), our 
success is, by definition, improving their 
financial circumstances and therefore a 
societal good. More importantly, given the 
facts, I think the beneficiaries would see it 
that way too. Our societal contract, or licence 
to operate, is essentially that – ‘improve my 
financial circumstances within the bounds 
of good conduct and I’ll be happy’.

Now, in theory one could argue that if we 
are doing this for employees of a firm that 
impacts society negatively, then is that 
improving the firm’s situation too and 
creating a negative impact? Possibly. But I 
don’t think that diminishes our responsibility 
to help past and present employees, most 
of whom don’t control firm decisions, be in 
a better financial situation. Could anyone 
really argue that those employees don’t 
deserve help or don’t deserve a sound pension 
because of the firm for which they worked?

I therefore believe our biggest negative 
societally, would be a failure to do our job 
well. The impact of this is clearly broad and 
bad – clients are less financially secure than 
they expected to be and someone has to 
pay for that, be it a sponsoring firm or an 
individual through working for longer and 
just having less money on which to live. From 
a personal perspective, this is the negative 
that I worry about more than any other by 
some margin. It is why, if we find that we 
are doing something that is not succeeding, 
we fix it or stop. I think that’s the only way 
for us to maintain our licence to operate. 

Finally, like all firms, it is important to 
set priorities. Ours for the next few years 
can be summarised in four themes:

–  We need, like all firms, to continue 

strengthening our corporate risk and 
operational processes in light of greater 
regulatory engagement and more complex 
client requirements;

–  We are seeking to diversify our business 
more effectively by client, asset and 
strategy type;

–  We are seeking to grow and have invested to 

do so, albeit in a focused way; and

–  We intend to continue institutionalising 
investment in R&D more effectively.

I now move to progress made during the 
year (along with issues we have faced). 

PROGRESS AND ISSUES DURING  
THE YEAR 
This year has involved a combination 
of mainly good progress but also some 
issues we have had to address. I want 
to start first with the issues, and then 
move on to how the year has gone.

ISSUES WE HAVE FACED
We have faced a number of these, about 
which most investors will be aware. 

Firstly, some months ago we dismissed a 
portfolio manager. I addressed this in my 
interim statement, so do not intend to go over 
that ground again. However, the benefit of 
some months having passed means we have a 
clearer idea of the effect on our business. We 
obviously expected losses in AUM, not least 
because of their profile, but retention has been 
towards the top end of our expectations. 

I would like to take the opportunity to 
thank the many people who offered us their 
support through this period. Decisions like 
these are inevitably hard to make and we are 
grateful to all those who told us they believed 
we were doing exactly the right thing.

Secondly, we announced in July we were 
significantly reducing the provision for a 
competition matter in relation to which 
we were engaging with the FCA. This is 
ongoing but the effect on the Group is 
now expected to be of a much smaller 
order of magnitude than some might 
have worried it could be. We believe this 
reflects, at least in part, the seriousness 
with which we take our relationship with 
our regulator and the importance of dealing 
properly with issues that emerge.

Thirdly, the CMA has issued in July 2018 a 
report on its provisional findings following 
its review of the investment consulting and 
fiduciary management industry. It is fair to 
say that these findings are more balanced 
than some industry participants feared they 
might be (we did not share these concerns). 

We have already issued a statement 
supporting the findings. In that statement 
I identified that we would have gone even 
further than the CMA in relation to FCA 
regulation, and required full regulation 
for all investment consultants and those 
involved in advising on fiduciary management 
appointments. We would be surprised if 
this didn’t end up being a requirement for 
investment consultants at least, because it 
is logical that this should be the case. Think 
about this from the perspective of a pension 
scheme beneficiary – why is the standard 
of care different when someone is advising 
on where to put my money, than when 
someone is directing it? The money still ends 
up somewhere, and whether the beneficiary 
can retire well is driven by this decision. 

In my view, the duty of care on the one 
providing the advice is identical to that of the 
fiduciary manager who directs, if considered 
from the perspective of the beneficiary’s 
outcome. Hence, both should be subjected 
to the same standard of regulation and that 
is why we have voluntarily adopted it in our 
Advisory division since its inception in 2001.

Collectively, these issues appear to have 
been clouds hanging over our firm that have 
now essentially been removed as far as 
investors are concerned. We hope they will 
now look beyond these issues and re-focus 
on the underlying strengths of the firm.

PROGRESS DURING THE YEAR
Starting with the most important factor, 
investment performance – we continue 
to deliver strongly to those outcomes 
our clients expect of us and I cover below 
the outcomes of our most significant 
strategies. For a firm focused on client 
outcomes, this is a critical measure.

DB Fiduciary
TIGS, our offering in this area, has delivered 
2.5% above its benchmark since inception in 
2004 (the longest track record in the UK), and 
in doing so has given our clients a meaningfully 
higher funding level than the typical scheme.

06

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW CONTINUED

DC Fiduciary
In the table below, we show the performance 
of our DC fiduciary management strategies 
that have been running live for nearly seven 
years, against similar strategies in the industry. 
As can be seen, despite an underperformance 
over the year against demanding, member 
outcome-driven benchmarks, longer-term 
investment performance is very close to 
the top which translates to strong member 
outcomes over this period relative to our 
peers. The underperformance in the year was a 
result of broadly flat or negative markets in the 
first quarter of the year. In this environment, 
targets in excess of inflation are challenging.

R&M fund vs peer group:
Risk-adjusted return

1.6

1.4

1.2

1.0

0.8

94th percentile

90th percentile

89th percentile

R&M Long 
Term Growth

R&M Stable
Growth
Peer group (excluding top and bottom 10%)
R&M fund

R&M Cautious
Growth

Structured equity
Our derivatives capability allows clients to 
put equity-like structures in place, providing 
downside protection and other features which 
improve outcomes, giving more certainty 
to returns and generally protecting against 
market drawdowns. In this way we ‘win by 
not losing’. The different structures we put 
in place depend on our clients objectives, 
for example they may also want to deliver 
returns in markets which are range-bound.

Advisory
As an investment partner, as well on a fully 
delegated basis with Fiduciary Management, 
we can be engaged to provide investment 
advice. In our Advisory division, we have 
continued to see significant improvements 
in funding levels during the year, which 
comes on top of strong success in recent 
years. The chart below shows our longest 
standing client’s funding level in recent 
years, compared with the typical UK 
pension scheme result as identified by 
the PPF (Pension Protection Fund).

Change in funding level 

%
160

140

120

100

80

60

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

River and Mercantile longest Advisory client

Average pension scheme (PPF)

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

07

Equities
Like structured equity, our ILC and PVT teams generally work as part of a broader portfolio, 
giving clients access to equity market exposure with high-active management giving rise to 
outperformance over the long term, as evidenced by all of our Equities funds being above 
benchmark since inception. I show the largest funds below:

Fund

UK Income

UK Smaller Companies

UK Long Term Recovery

World Recovery

UK High Alpha

Global High Alpha

ILC – Global EM

Relative 
performance 
since inception

1.4%

6.6%

6.0%

5.0%

2.7%

4.1%

0.6%

Inception 
date

Feb-09

Nov-06

Jul-08

Mar-13

Nov-06

Dec-14

Dec-18

Multi-asset
As a newer part of our offering, both the Dynamic Asset Allocation (DAA) Fund and Global Macro 
Fund (discussed on page 9) have delivered impressive returns since launch, with DAA 5% ahead 
of benchmark since inception and Global Macro up 8% since it was fully seeded by the Group in 
March 2018. 

Client attrition
As well as our engagement approach, this investment performance is a key reason our 
institutional attrition rate has again been low. The table below shows our regretted institutional 
attrition (RIA) rate in recent years, split by individual business line. 

Fiduciary Management

Derivative Solutions

Equity Solutions – Institutional

Overall

2018

0.2%

3%1

0.3%

3%1

2017

1%

4%

12%

3%

2016

4%

4%

0.5%

4%

1 

In the current year, the KPI figure includes a large single derivatives mandate which matured; and whilst it has not been replaced, 
we remain appointed. I have excluded this amount in my analysis due to us staying appointed, but the strict definition of the KPI 
includes it.

For more details on how the RIA rate is calculated, see the financial review.

We have always been focused on delivering first on client outcomes, in the belief that this would 
lead to much higher retention levels and greater stability for the business to continue operating. 
This is a critical element of our strategy and clearly remains true. We are successful at it because 
culturally our people care about succeeding for our clients. 

DISTRIBUTION
The Group has grown AUM by 9% this 
year. This is certainly behind some of our 
competitors whose books are more equity 
focused, and that’s fine. If investors want 
beta focused businesses, there will always 
be better choices than us. Our focus is 
on stable growth through time and in 
building a robust, diversified business.

In previous reports, I have identified that at 
this stage in the cycle I would expect equities 
and derivatives to do well, and that advisory 
and fiduciary would be more muted. So it has 
proved, and growth headlines are as follows:

–  Our Equities business has grown 

management fee revenue at 41% during the 
year. This is after losses from a portfolio 
manager’s departure;

–  Our Derivatives business has grown revenue 

at 8% during the year. This is after the 
maturity of a large structured equity 
mandate which did its job but where the 
hedge has not yet been put back on. These 
mandates not rolling is relatively rare, and it 
may well be that it rolls back on at some point 
(we remain appointed by the client); and

–  Our Fiduciary and Advisory businesses have 

been relatively flat for the year. 

While my expectations have been that 
the growth of the fiduciary and advisory 
businesses would be more modest, it is clear 
they have been particularly impacted by 
the market’s reaction to the CMA review.

Opportunities to pitch during this year have 
been far more limited than they have been 
historically and we believe that a number 
of potential clients and intermediaries have 
put reviews on hold until the outcome is 
resolved. Now the CMA’s position is clearer, 
it seems likely that at some point normal 
tendering opportunities should resume, 
along with a much more significant number 
of competitive tenders that should emerge 
as a result of the CMA’s guidance. 

When this emerges is the question, but I think 
it is more likely that tendering opportunities 
should start to rise in the coming months 
and be much more significant by the first 
half of calendar year 2019. The good news 
is that the average number of tendering 
opportunities in the next five years should 
be much higher than in the previous five 
(as it seems quite a lot of mandates may 
have been appointed non-competitively). 

 
08

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW CONTINUED

We are still comfortable that our belief 
in a net management and advisory fee 
revenue growth rate of at least 12% 
per annum remains appropriate.

We have also during the year 
announced two developments aimed 
at accelerating distribution:

–  Tim Horan has been appointed as MD of our 
Australian business, in order to drive faster 
development of a business where we already 
manage around £0.6bn; and

–  Tom Cassara and Dave Goldblum have been 

appointed in New York to lead the 
development of our US Solutions business, 
particularly into larger clients. 

We are very excited about these 
appointments and believe they will be 
strongly positive for our growth plans.

We also see good opportunities in the 
development of new strategies, and I 
address this more fully in a later section. In 
summary, we have successfully launched 
the Global Macro Fund, as we had previously 
indicated, and are in the process of launching 
a platform-led structured equity solution 
(for investors to be able to access structured 
equity on a platform). Both of these are 
significant moves for us and should allow 
us to distribute to clients that we may not 
have previously been able to serve. 

SUMMARY OF PROGRESS/ISSUES 
DURING THE YEAR
The Group continues to perform well 
for clients. Our Equities and Derivatives 
businesses have performed as we expected. 
Our Advisory and Fiduciary Management 
lines have been more muted as expected, 
exacerbated by the CMA review into the 
industry. We expect in the coming years that 
opportunities to grow Fiduciary Management 
in particular should strengthen considerably. 

We have strengthened our distribution 
resource considerably in the US and in 
Australia, as markets we have previously 
identified as key for us. We continue to 
support the growth in the business through 
the launch of new strategies that help 
clients achieve their desired outcomes.

MARKET OUTLOOK
In communicating to clients and investors, we generally tend to use a four-phase approach 
to thinking about where we are in the market cycle. These four phases are as follows:

–  Generalised upward re-rating – most classes rise at the same time. This phase always occurs 

from markets being cheap;

–  Stable conditions – economically everything is at least OK, credit conditions are generally 

supportive, and markets are neither very cheap nor very expensive;

–  Apprehension – markets are expensive, however conditions are still generally supportive, 

so markets tend to keep on rising; and

–  Downturn – markets fall, or get ready to do so, and this is generally coupled with worsening 

credit conditions and/or a worsening economic outlook. 

During February 2018, our four-phase process indicated a move from late apprehension into a 
downturn. A large part of this was because credit conditions worsened. 

In addition, our forward indicators of Purchasing Managers Indices (PMIs, leading economic 
indicators) suggest meaningful falls from here, which would generally imply a downturn in risk 
markets and probably falling bond yields. The chart below displays US PMIs and our indicator. 
As you can see, it has been a fairly reliable predictor of actual results, and its outlook is negative.

US PMI outlook

PMI score

62

57

52

47

42

2004

2006

2008

2010

2012

2014

2016

2018

2020

US Manufacturing PMI

R&M – US PMI Indicator

This year we have seen more volatile markets. We have become more defensive in multi-asset 
mandates and in our advice to pension schemes. 

What is perhaps more interesting is to think through from here what the potential outcomes 
could be in terms of where we land, assuming we are in fact in a downturn. The most interesting 
issue here for us is whether we land into an upward re-rating, or into stable conditions. This is 
important because it influences which markets should respond and how we market the various 
strategies we have. 

In an upward re-rating large cap developed equities should do well. Conversely, if we land in 
stable conditions, small cap (particularly in US/global form) should work better, and emerging 
markets should really come into their own. 

Our view is currently that it is more likely we will land in stable conditions. This is because equity 
markets would have to fall 30%+ to put us back into an upward re-rating. 

The chart below shows how overvalued markets currently are, based on our internal model of  
fair value.

Valuations are a long way from being ‘cheap’

% over/undervalued

40

20

0

-20

-40

1990

1992

1994

1996 1998

2000

2002

2004

2006 2008

2010

2012

2014

2016

2018

Source: R&M proprietary US equity market valuation analysis.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

09

But these sorts of falls only generally tend 
to happen when we have a significant 
economic downturn. The chart to the right 
shows the relationship between market and 
economic drawdowns to illustrate this point.

There are plenty of risks around, even with 
falling PMIs, but it is hard currently to see 
this becoming such an economic problem 
that we move into recession (barring 
some financial crisis that emerges, which 
can never be dismissed completely).

Similarly, we’d need to see much higher 
credit spreads to justify an upward re-rating, 
and currently it seems hard to see how that 
would happen, unless we have an economic 
downturn (which really means a recession). 

As a result, we are reflecting this in our product 
development, and it is to this I turn next.

NEW PRODUCTS AND RESEARCH AND 
DEVELOPMENT
In my last annual statement, I identified that 
the launch of global macro, international high 
alpha and international small cap strategies 
would be part of the growth strategy for 
the next five years (now the next four). We 
launched the Global Macro Fund on 1 March 
2018 with corporate seed money, but have 
not yet launched the other strategies. The 
launch of international high alpha is really 
only dependent on matching a US launch 
of a pooled vehicle with seeding money 
(and therefore will happen when we have 
appropriate client support). The launch (or not) 
of the other two strategies, coupled with our 
pipeline of new strategies, is more involved. It 
is therefore worth me explaining the thinking.

Shareholders would, in a perfect world, like 
us to win, grow and retain assets from clients, 
and in doing so charge an appropriate fee from 
which we can generate a meaningful profit 
margin. There are some simple influences 
on the ‘win, grow and retain’ part of this 
statement. For us to retain the assets, the 
investment strategy will need to perform well 
and also have long term strategic use. For it 
to grow, it will need to produce meaningful 
positive returns. Obviously the strategy will 
need to have enough capacity in it to have a 
meaningful impact on the overall business.

 I have spoken about these issues in the past 
as part of our strategic focus – we want to 
offer strategies with relatively high revenue 
capacity, that offer meaningful positive 
returns, and that are strategically useful for 
clients so they might hold them for the long 
term. On the last point, our client outcome-led 
approach gives us particular insight into the 
reasons that clients tend to hold strategies for 
long periods. This insight is one of the reasons 
our institutional attrition rate is so low.

Equity drawdown

0%

-2%

-4%

-6%

-8%

-10%

0%

-10%

-20%

-30%

-40%

-50%

-60%

1967

1972

1977

1982

1987

1992

1997

2002

2007

2012

2017

Equity drawdown (RHS)

GDP drawdown

Drawdown is actual value vs prior 3 year maximum.

The ‘win’ part of the above we think about in a slightly different way. Obviously we consider 
whether we have the skills to offer a strategy, and the competitive environment within which 
we are engaging. But specifically for us there are three additional issues we consider:

–  Timing of launch. Practically, we all know that starting investment strategies well is helpful in 

building up a track record that clients consider to be appropriate enough to buy. Hence it can be 
helpful to time the launch so that the subsequent environment is positive for the track record;

–  Conditions for client engagement. We also seek to time the launch such that clients will have  
a need for the strategy at the time it is available. We are seeking to avoid the circumstance 
where we launch a great strategy (in theory) but there is no demand or motivation to buy it, 
because clients have other problems to worry about. Selling long-only equity strategies in the 
period where clients were more focused on alternatives is a good example in recent years; and

–  More than one strategic reason to buy. While this is not necessarily true for all strategies, it 
certainly helps, particularly for very high capacity strategies. Building strategies that can be 
used by different clients in different ways is a particular advantage, as it gives us multiple 
sources of potential demand. 

The table below shows how we consider the new strategies stack up against our criteria:

Criteria

Global Macro

Meaningful 
performance levels?

Multiple strategic uses?

Yes

Yes

International 
Small Cap

Platform-led 
Structured Equity

Yes

Yes (but less than 
others)

Yes

Yes

EMAR

Yes

Yes

High potential asset/
revenue capacity

Very high

Decent (around 
£20–30m of 
revenue)

Decent (£20m+  
of revenue if 
successful)

Good (£50m+  
of revenue at 
capacity)

Current conditions 
positive for 
performance?

Conditions positive for 
client engagement?

Yes

Yes

Uncertain

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

It’s worth looking at the Global Macro Fund and international small cap, along with two other 
new products we are bringing on line, against these criteria. This should illustrate well how 
we think about R&D and how it integrates with client need and the growth in the business.

The two other products are platform-led structured equity and Emerging Markets Absolute 
Return (EMAR). The first involves us making structured equity available, for the first time, on an 
institutional platform. This will allow DB schemes to access structured equity without the hassle 
of putting in place their own documentation. They will still be able to tailor the design to their 
own particular needs. 

The second strategy – EMAR – will do two things. First, it combines the country allocation 
emerging market process we have been running within Fiduciary Management for some time, 
with the stock selection of the ILC team we brought in from Credit Suisse around a year ago. 
Second, it operates a dynamic market hedge, which aims to reduce exposure to markets in a 
downturn to preserve value. 

10

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW CONTINUED

All strategies, as they should, satisfy the 
strategic criteria. But they vary in relation to 
their attractiveness in current conditions. We 
took the view that the Global Macro Fund, 
which is specifically engineered to defend 
downturns, should be launching close to a 
turning point. So it proved, and the track 
record of the strategy subsequently has borne 
that out. We also know there is currently 
meaningful demand for macro strategies in 
UCITS form, hence the logic for the launch 
which occurred earlier this year.

Similarly for platform-led structured equity – 
we have known in our Fiduciary Management 
and Advisory businesses for some time that if 
it were possible to put structured equity in 
platform form, it would solve a key need. Our 
Derivatives team has done a great job in 
working through the technicalities of how to 
do this, and we expect to be in a position to 
launch this in the coming financial year. 

For International Small Cap, the chart 
below shows how different strategies in 
absolute terms tend to perform in different 
environments. What is interesting about 
this is the strength of small cap returns in 
stable conditions, but also the potential 
weakness in a downturn. This is therefore 
probably not the best environment to be 
launching a small cap strategy from the 
perspective of client demand. It is also 
hard to call whether a market downturn 
will be favourable for added value or not.

Average annual performance during
market phase

%

30

20

10

0

-10

-20

-30

Upward
re-rating

Stable

Apprehension Downturn  

MSCI World ex US
MSCI World Small Cap ex US
Relative

Much of our R&D works this way – posing 
‘ideal’ questions and trying to determine 
whether it can be done. In practice, the way 
we are running this is analogous to the famous 
‘skunkworks’. We draw people from anywhere 
in the business to work on big problems, 
where the solution creates potentially large 
added value. We currently have a range 
of such projects under way, and will keep 
you updated as these create meaningful 
developments for the firm and its clients. 

OVERALL SUMMARY
We have had a decent year in the Group 
and moved past some issues we faced. We 
continue to perform well and deliver on client 
outcomes across all lines, and the Group 
continues to experience low attrition and high 
client satisfaction. We have strengthened 
our distribution resource in markets we 
have previously identified as key and have 
added new strategies to support growth. 

I think we are positioned well for where 
we believe we are in the market cycle, 
and this is informing how we approach 
product launches. We have continued 
during the year to strengthen our corporate 
processes and reinforce our culture, which 
is critical for us to continue delivering 
value to clients and shareholders.

I remain of the view that we are well 
positioned to make good progress 
towards our strategic objectives.

Mike Faulkner
Chief Executive Officer

EMAR is perhaps the most complex strategy 
for which to time a launch. On the one hand, 
its performance is likely to be (and on paper 
has been) very strong during a downturn in 
relative and absolute terms. On the other, we 
are doubtful there will be significant demand 
for an EM strategy until we emerge from a 
downturn. People want EM exposure, but they 
realise the benefits of buying it with a strategy 
that seeks to take out some of the downside. 
Hence we are taking the view that launching 
it part way through the downturn (towards 
the end of calendar year 2018) is the right 
approach. This gives the strategy a chance 
to build up some track record, while at the 
same time positioning it closer to the point at 
which we would expect demand to emerge. 

Hopefully this gives you as an investor in the 
Group some insight into, and confidence in, 
the logic we are applying to efficiently use 
resources to bring new strategies on line. 

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
It is probably now worth me spending some 
time on how we organise our R&D efforts. 
Whilst this is occurring across the Group in 
every business area, we have during the year 
created a team focused on driving forward 
our macro thinking and how it can be used to 
create new strategies and improve existing 
ones. Our research focus is on the creation 
of new intellectual property that can be used 
to generate significant absolute returns. 

The EMAR strategy emerged from this 
thinking. It was obvious from the start that, 
if it were possible to build something that 
combined a strong source of added value 
within emerging markets, with a dynamic 
hedge, this should produce a great strategy. 
We just didn’t know whether it could be done 
– so our R&D process focused on trying to 
answer this question. The result is a strategy 
available for launch in the coming months.

“ I remain of the view that we are  
well positioned to make good progress 
towards our strategic objectives.”

INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

11

Our products aim to add meaningful value for clients, in a  
way that makes a significant difference to their circumstances. 

Annualised investment performance
by investment strategy

TIGS
PIL Stable Growth Fund
Inflation Plus Fund
Fiduciary DC1
Dynamic Asset Allocation Fund
Global Macro
Fiduciary Insurance
US Fiduciary

Total Fiduciary AUM

UK Income
UK Smaller Companies
UK Long Term Recovery
World Recovery
World Recovery Focus
UK High Alpha
UK Core Segregated
UK Dynamic Equity
UK Equity Micro Cap Investment 
Company
Global High Alpha1
Segregated Mandates
ILC – Global EM
ILC – Small/Mid Cap

Total Equities AUM

Structured Equity
LDI

Total Derivatives NUM

Total AUM/NUM

AUM/
NUM £bn 
Jun-18

Estimated 
Capacity 
£bn

1 Year (%)

3 Years (% p.a.)

5 Years (% p.a.)

Since inception (% p.a.)

Abs.

Rel.

Abs.

Rel.

Abs.

Rel.

Abs.

Rel.

Date

2.6%
3.4% (0.1)%
0.1%
3.5%
3.5% (2.6)%
3.9%
4.3%
n/a
n/a
n/a
(0.0)%
6.9% (0.2)%

0.2% 10.6%
7.1%
7.2%
7.9%
6.4%
n/a
n/a

3.0% 11.3%
7.2%
3.6%
6.8%
4.4%
8.4%
2.4%
n/a
5.9%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
5.7% (0.5)%

8.6% (1.0)%

8.4% (0.6)%

15.4%
13.9%

6.6% 15.2%
4.9% 13.5%
7.9% (1.1)% 15.4%
5.5% 11.8%
16.3%
4.2% 11.7%
13.2%
2.1% 10.2%
11.1%
2.1% 11.7%
11.1%
30.3% 21.5% 30.3% 20.0%

9.8%
4.8% 19.4%
3.9% 15.2%
0.7% 15.9%
3.6% 13.3%
2.1% 13.3%
0.6% 10.0%
2.1% 13.0%
n/a

2.5% Jan-04
2.9% 10.1%
4.6% Dec-08
8.4%
3.7%
3.9% Mar-04
6.9%
4.4%
3.4% Oct-11
8.8%
3.2%
5.3% Sep-14
5.8%
n/a
7.6% Mar-182
9.8%
n/a
0.8%
n/a
n/a Apr-16
6.0% (0.6)% Aug-13
n/a

0.9% 13.4%
8.3% 13.5%
6.3% 14.5%
3.5% 16.9%
3.9% 18.4%
9.1%
4.4%
9.9%
1.2%
8.1%
4.2%
n/a

1.4% Feb-09
6.6% Nov-06
6.0% Jul-08
5.0% Mar-13
8.6% Feb-12
2.7% Nov-06
1.7% Nov-10
2.1% Mar-07
29.2% 17.3% Dec-14

1.8% 17.8%
n/a

10.8%
n/a

n/a
6.1% (2.1)%
1.6% (5.6)%

3.1%
n/a
4.9% (0.7)%
2.4% (1.4)%

n/a
n/a
5.3%
6.1%

n/a
n/a
0.3%
2.4%

17.0%
n/a
4.1%
4.5%

n/a

4.1% Dec-14
n/a
0.6% Dec-18
2.7% Dec-18

n/a3

Dec-05
Dec-05

9.4

0.2
0.2
0.0
0.2
0.6

10.6

0.3
0.6
0.3
0.5
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.1

0.1
1.6
0.2
0.1

4.6

30.0

10.0
n/a
n/a
n/a

40

2.0
0.8
0.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.1

7.0
n/a
3.5
2.0

21

3.8
14.8

18.6

33.8

>20
>30

>50

>100

1. Composite performance.
2. Date of Group seeding following short test-trade period.
3. Derivatives mandates do not target investment outperformance therefore this is not measured.

We have delivered strong and consistent 
long-term investment returns for our 
clients across our business and we believe 
we are in the rare minority of investment 
businesses with almost a complete suite of 
offerings which are performing meaningfully 
above their respective benchmark.

In a world that is increasingly bifurcating 
between passive and active investment 
management, we have clearly demonstrated 
our ability to deliver to our clients very strong 
positive relative and absolute outperformance 
across the entire range of asset management 
strategies. It is this along with excellence 
in client service recognised in our client 
satisfaction survey, which distinguishes our 
business amongst other asset managers.

The information above is disclosed in 
order to allow shareholders to assess the 
current performance of our investment 
strategies. While historical investment 
performance is not an indicator of future 
investment performance, the long-
term track records of our strategies 
give shareholders an indication of the 
sustainability of our investment performance 
across different investment cycles.

The information regarding the capacity 
of the strategies gives shareholders an 
indication of the available capacity in each 
of the strategies to determine the potential 
for future growth in AUM and revenues.

All investment performance is shown before 
the Group’s management and performance 
fees are deducted. This gross of fees basis is 
chosen as it enables comparison of investment 
returns to be made across share classes and 
clients with different fee arrangements. 
The benchmark and target used to calculate 
relative performance is also on a gross of 
fees basis. Accordingly, we believe that 
the presentation of the gross investment 
performance allows shareholders to more 
clearly assess the potential for each of the 
strategies, independent of the investors’ 
specific contractual fee arrangements.

12

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

BUSINESS MODEL
DIVERSIFIED GROWTH ACROSS OUR DIVISIONS

OVERALL APPROACH TO WHAT WE DO

HOW WE ARE STRUCTURED

The core ethos of the Group 
is to be aligned with our 
clients’ desired outcomes.

The Group is structured into four divisions:

All of the divisions operate as part of a single business and are complementary in nature, 
allowing for the distribution of multiple advisory and investment solutions to clients. 
Each division has different and complementary capabilities which can be applied singly 
or in combination to deliver a client outcome. 

Our purpose is simple – to identify our 
clients’ actual financial problems and 
needs, and solve them as effectively as 
possible. This involves us doing two 
things well:

SOLUTIONS
led by Kevin Hayes

FIDUCIARY 
MANAGEMENT

1

Understanding our clients in great depth – in order 
that we can define the need in the right level of  
detail and can solve the need fully. This involves us 
understanding clearly the environment within which 
they operate. For example, how defined benefit 
funding works, or the influence of Solvency II on 
insurance clients, are important to understand if we 
are to appreciate properly the investment needs.

ADVISORY

2

Developing and maintaining very strong investment 
skills that can be deployed in various ways to solve 
these investment challenges.

ASSET MANAGEMENT
led by James Barham

DERIVATIVE 
SOLUTIONS

PRINCIPAL RISKS
Our operations are underpinned by our 
approach to risk management.

EQUITY  
SOLUTIONS

 p.34

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

13

HOW WE GENERATE REVENUE

THE RESULTS FOR…

The Group generates revenue 
in four main ways: 

MANAGEMENT FEES
In Fiduciary Management, Derivative Solutions and Equity 
Solutions divisions, fees are generally charged based  
upon levels of Assets under Management or Notional  
under Management in Derivatives (‘AUM’ and ‘NUM’ 
respectively). These fees are expressed as basis points 
(‘bps’) charged on the levels of AUM and NUM. Fees vary 
between products and clients, depending on factors such 
as client type, mandate size, and product type. This means 
that they can vary as the mix of products changes.

THE RESULT FOR SHAREHOLDERS
We believe that delivery against our 
strategy will lead to:

GROWTH IN NET 
MANAGEMENT AND 
ADVISORY FEES

–  Strong underlying revenue growth per 
annum from organic sources over an 
increasing range of investment 
solutions

–  Growth adjusted underlying profit 

margin over time

–   Continuing growth in underlying 

dividends, with additional returns from 
performance fees.

PERFORMANCE FEES
Some Equity and Fiduciary mandates include performance 
fees, which are earned for investment performance above  
a specific benchmark. These benchmarks are carefully 
tailored to client outcomes, to ensure that the Group’s 
reward is closely linked to the interests of our clients. In 
other divisions, the client objectives are generally not 
linked to absolute investment outperformance and 
therefore performance fees are not used.

THE RESULT FOR OTHER 
STAKEHOLDERS
Our focus on long term client relationships 
creates a stable business which allows us to 
reward our employees and provide strong 
career development. As a sustainable  
and profitable business we are able to 
contribute to the broader community.

ADVISORY RETAINERS
Advisory retainers are earned where clients engage us to 
provide pre-agreed levels of service over time, generally  
a year. They are often recurring over a number of years.

ADVISORY PROJECTS
Where clients engage us for specific ad hoc advisory 
engagements, we categorise the income as project 
revenue. Many of our advisory project clients are also 
retainer or fiduciary clients, or clients of other divisions.

THE OUTCOMES FOR THE BUSINESS 
Our approach leads to long-term 
relationships with clients, who have an 
expectation and understanding of how 
we will engage with them to meet their 
outcomes. Our Advisory and Fiduciary 
relationships result in us being closely 
involved with the investment process 
of our clients, which in turn gives us 
a greater insight into their needs.

The outcome this delivers for our 
business is a stable and recurring 
revenue base which expands with an 
increasing level of services and range of 
activities with each client engagement.

This is reflected in our growth in 
AUM/NUM, low attrition rates, 
and high client satisfaction.

15%

ADJUSTED UNDERLYING 
MARGIN

25%

TOTAL DIVIDEND FOR  
THE YEAR

18.6p

OVERALL REMUNERATION 
RATIO

52%

REGRETTED INSTITUTIONAL 
ATTRITION

8%

GROWTH IN AUM/NUM

9%

14

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

THE DIVISIONS

The Group is organised into four divisions. All of the 
divisions operate as part of a single business and 
are complementary in nature, allowing for the 
distribution of multiple advisory and investment 
solutions to clients. Each division has different 
capabilities which can be applied singly or in 
combination to deliver a client outcome.

DIVISION

WHAT WE DO

FIDUCIARY 
MANAGEMENT

£10.6bn
AUM

ADVISORY

>£25bn
AUA

DERIVATIVE 
SOLUTIONS

£18.6bn
NUM

EQUITY  
SOLUTIONS

£4.6bn
AUM

Fiduciary Management involves the delegation by 
clients of a range of services to the Group, within an 
agreed governance framework. These include asset 
allocation, hedging, and manager selection. 

Our clients are predominantly DB pension schemes 
through the Total Investment Governance Solution 
(TIGS) product, but also now encompass DC and 
Insurance clients. 

The Advisory division provides investment, actuarial  
and transaction advice to UK DB pension schemes,  
UK DC pension schemes, US pension schemes and 
insurance firms. 

Advice is given either on a retainer basis, or through 
ad-hoc projects. 

River and Mercantile Derivatives offers fully tailored 
segregated derivative solutions. The segregated 
approach gives full access to a range of derivative 
strategies.

Our approach allows clients to access:

–  LDI

–  Synthetic Equity and protection strategies and
–  Currency hedging.
We believe this approach should be accessible to all 
pension schemes irrespective of size.

River and Mercantile Equity Solutions is a long-only 
active equity manager providing a range of equity 
products and solutions across the following markets:

–  UK Equities (Potential, Valuation, Timing (PVT) Team)
–  Global Equities (PVT Team)
–  Emerging Market Equities (ILC Team).

These investment strategies are offered on a segregated 
and pooled basis to retail intermediaries on a wholesale 
basis in the UK, and to institutional clients in the UK, 
Europe, US, Australia and New Zealand.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

15

WHAT DIFFERENTIATES US

STRATEGY HIGHLIGHTS

–  One of the longest track records in providing fiduciary management to UK DB pension 

Our strategy falls into three areas:

schemes dating back to 2004 and DC schemes since 2011

–  A robust and repeatable macro-economic led investment process which has 

demonstrated skill in proactively rotating asset class exposure and taking opportunities 
to generate very strong returns and strong risk management 

–  A strong focus in our consulting approach on client needs (as evidenced by our client 

satisfaction scores)

–  A clear eye on capacity to ensure all clients can benefit from niche opportunities, often 

overlooked by the broader market, to deliver strong performance

–  Ability to leverage the Group’s derivatives capability to provide truly integrated, bespoke 

risk management solutions irrespective of client size or type.

–  A performance fee structure linked to a transparent scheme liability benchmark, given 

strong alignment.

– 

Investment: Continue to invest in our macro-economic process to ensure continuing 
ability to generate strong risk-adjusted returns

–  Proposition: Key to our strategy is flexibility, whereby size doesn’t constrain or limit our 
clients’ access to our best ideas and innovative thinking. We continue to innovate the 
delivery of the fiduciary proposition to meet evolving client needs in a flexible manner

–  Distribution: 

1.  Continue to strengthen relationships with third party intermediaries to support their 

engagement with prospects 

2.  Articulate directly to market our views on the need (and how and when) to generate 

return in maturing DB plans.

–  As an investment specialist, we develop a strong partnership with our clients and their 

–  Flexibility is core to the Advisory division offering clients a tailored service designed 

key stakeholders through the delivery of focused investment advice 

specially around their needs, preferences and governance requirements

–  Very strong focus in our consulting approach on client needs (as evidenced by client 

satisfaction scores)

–  Direct trading expertise offering deeper insights to macro and derivative markets 

ensuring proactive advice for clients

–  All clients have access to our best ideas and latest thinking, irrespective of their size or 
approach to engagement – using the same underlying macro-economic led investment 
process which drives our Fiduciary Management proposition 

–  We don’t believe in the industry’s ‘set and forget’ approach, rather we adapt our advice to 

clients to get them to their end goal with greater certainty.

–  The division expects to deepen its client base within its core practice areas, particular DB 
pension schemes where today the emphasis on investment return is critical. We believe 
now more than ever there is a need amongst most UK DB plans for strong returns into the 
future driven by a genuine understanding of macro-economic fundamentals 

–  The division continues to explore other institutional segments suited to its specialist 

approach, both within the UK and overseas markets.

–  We do not offer pooled funds – we believe passionately that a segregated approach 

provides the best result for clients

Our strategy includes working with pension schemes that have been underserviced in 
derivatives management:

–  We will work with clients of any size – our average client size is significantly smaller than 

–  Small private sector pension schemes – sub £500m pension schemes who tend to be 

our competitors

limited to pooled funds

–  Equity derivative specialist – we have always provided equity derivative strategies as a 

core offering and have a long performance track record

– 

Improve access for Local Government Pension Schemes (LGPS) who have struggled 
historically to implement derivatives

–  Systems – we have a dedicated system development team which means we can easily 

Our small scheme strategy involves:

systemise what we do to the benefit of our clients

–  LGPS – we believe we are the first derivatives manager to have segregated local 

government pension scheme derivatives documentation.

– 

Innovating the approach to segregated LDI to make it feel as easy as a pooled fund

–  Educating consultants on the benefit to their clients of a segregated approach

–  With an aim to become known as the champion of small schemes

Our LGPS strategy involves:

–  Building a documentation suite to allow LGPS to implement derivatives

–  Meeting with LGPS representatives to educate and inform on the benefits of derivatives.

–  We believe a specialist investment business, with high levels of ownership and aligned 

interests represents the best investment environment leading to superior performance 
for clients

–  We will continue to emphasise client engagement; we spend a great deal of time with our 
clients understanding their needs and ensuring that the investment products that are 
developed meet these specific requirements

–  We look to consistently exploit proven factors to generate strong absolute and relative 
investment returns with an approach which is systematic, repeatable and scalable

–  Our multi-factor approaches and understanding of investment cycles have enabled us to 
generate strong returns in the past and position us well to continue to deliver for our 
clients in the future

–  We will look to grow in our core UK markets, but also expect to build upon the success of 
recent mandate wins in the US and Australasian markets to drive growth overseas and 
provide distribution diversification

–  We will continue to broaden our product set to respond to high conviction investment 

opportunities and sustainable client needs

–  We have exceptional fund managers and analysts with significant insight and experience, 
and outstanding track records and decision making processes that are based off a flat and 
fully accountable structure where high conviction investments are put into client portfolios.

–  We will invest upfront in our people and investment infrastructure to ensure that we have 

the right mix of experience, skills and investment tools to continue to deliver strong 
investment returns.

16

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

OPERATING BUSINESS REVIEW

CONTINUING TO  
DELIVER STRONG  
RETURNS FOR CLIENTS

Strategically, our focus currently is on 
growing the following capabilities:

–  Equity Solutions 

To continue the distribution of Global and 
UK Value, and EM-based strategies, with an 
emphasis on international jurisdictions.

–  Core Derivatives 

To grow our core derivatives capabilities, 
primarily in the UK, through intermediated, 
platform and local government channels.

–  Active Derivatives 

To develop our active derivative capabilities, 
where we are combining market views with 
our derivative overlay capabilities, for both 
our existing Solutions’ clients and other 
CIO-led organisations.

–  Fiduciary Management 

To prepare to meet the demand for 
Fiduciary Management pitches in the UK 
emerging from the final report from the 
CMA.

–  Macro 

To develop the Macro business throughout 
the next 12 to 18 months.

–  Advice 

To focus on growth in US advisory 
opportunities through our New York 
expansion, and through preparation for the 
more difficult market conditions we see 
facing our clients more generally in the  
near term.

In this section I want to focus on our existing 
business lines, specifically how they have 
performed over the last 12 months and 
how we are positioned going forward in 
the current market conditions with these 
strategic imperatives that Mike has set.

James Barham
Deputy Group Chief Executive 

The CEO, Mike Faulkner, has 
set out in his section a clear 
assessment of our strategic 
focus in that we are trying 
to balance four priorities:

–  We need, like all firms, to continue to 
strengthen our corporate risk and 
operational processes, in light of greater 
regulatory engagement and more complex 
client requirements. 

–  We are seeking to diversify our business 
more effectively by client, asset and 
strategy type. 

–  We are seeking to grow and have invested to 

do so, albeit in a focused way.

–  We intend to continue institutionalising 

investment R&D more effectively.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

17

“ I look forward to the future with a high  
degree of optimism and excitement.”

The commercial logic that drove the original 
creation of our Group meets the market 
need now
We have articulated in previous reports the 
commercial logic that led to the establishment 
of the Group in 2014 and the diversification 
benefits that this provides through the 
economic cycle. We have set out in the 
following pages a broader description of our 
main operating businesses, our various routes 
to market and the associated revenue lines. 
We recognised when we merged in 2014 that 
this represented a fundamental shift in the 
dynamics of our industry, one that had been 
defined by the relationship between asset 
owners, asset advisors/consultants and asset 
managers. The boundaries were clear, and in 
the UK market clearly designated, however 
it has been fascinating to observe how these 
close but separated relationships had begun 
to evolve over the last five to ten years. 
There have been examples of asset owners 
becoming asset managers, asset consultants 
becoming asset managers and asset managers 
striving to understand their evolving role. 

In its shift from FSA to FCA the regulator was 
clear that it wanted the asset management 
industry to understand their clients better, 
to leave behind the ‘build and sell’ mentality 
and to adopt a more consultative approach to 
product development and client engagement. 
This was the foundation of the discussions 
between River and Mercantile Asset 
Management LLP and P-Solve Investments 
Limited in 2013, which was also based on 
a previous live experience of this concept. 
The UK Recovery Fund was designed and 
launched in 2008 in conjunction with Hugh 
Sergeant’s PVT team and the Fiduciary 
Management team at P-Solve Investments 
Limited to meet a specific investment need.

We recognised that this merger would 
accelerate the vision across the industry 
that participants should not be governed 
by narrow constraints and must evolve to 
ensure that clients’ needs are best served. 
These shifting sands are best seen in the 
Australian institutional market where there 
has been fundamental change taking place 
for a number of years and this change is 
driving how market participants are shaped. 

Since the creation of the ‘Super’ concept 
in 1992, the growth in providers exploded 
and at its height there were over 2,000 
superannuation funds. Many of these funds 
were seeking to deliver the same outcome for 

their clients, yet were not taking advantage 
of cost and capital synergies that would 
result following a period of consolidation. 
This process began a number of years ago 
and the number of superannuation funds 
has fallen to 250, mainly industry and 
state. In fact, there are only 20 corporate 
superannuation funds left. Market participants 
believe that this will ultimately fall below 
100, although this level of consolidation 
will bring with it other challenges. 

This ‘consolidation’ has driven the next 
stage in this evolutionary tale, that is 
‘internalisation’. Many services and 
needs previously provided by a range of 
suppliers have been internalised within 
the Super, this includes everything from 
financial advice for their members, to 
asset management and asset consulting 
services. This internalisation programme 
changes the way the asset management 
industry engages with these powerful 
asset owners. The concept of partnership 
has emerged whereby asset managers are 
not solely providing isolated products, 
but can become much more entrenched in 
driving the delivery of broader services and 
solutions, at a lower cost and where that 
solution is meeting specific client needs. 

To respond to this and our growing client 
relations in Australia, we have opened a 
local office and hired a high profile individual 
to run this important market. I will discuss 
this later in the section on distribution.

The UK market has not been immune from 
these changes and whilst it is not apparent 
that we have followed a similar path to 
Australia, there are many similarities. We 
have a large and diverse number of pension 
funds and the process of consolidation, whilst 
somewhat different, has the same outcome. 
The development of the fiduciary market in the 
UK has had a similar impact to consolidation 
and in many cases incorporated elements of 
internalisation. Providers of fiduciary services 
are increasingly recognising that they face 
the same aggregate fee challenges that 
confronted the Superannuation market in 
Australia. As a result, there is a growing need 
to be able to manufacture specific solutions to 
meet the needs of our clients, both Fiduciary 
and more broadly across the business. 

Consolidation is taking place in the local 
government sector, and it will be interesting 
to observe how this process develops and 

whether this leads to a process of 
internalisation. The development of UK 
Super funds is starting to emerge and should 
drive consolidation in the corporate pension 
fund market. 

This is an area in which we are well positioned 
to offer a leading proposition. There are few 
other organisations that have, within their own 
businesses, the combination of investment 
skills and requisite experience required to 
provide this valuable solution. The Group was 
the first to develop the fiduciary concept in the 
UK market in a form designed to respond to 
specific client needs and the development of 
the Super concept in the UK is an area in which 
we see strong parallels. We also see this trait in 
the UK wholesale market and expect that we 
will see further consolidation in the provision 
of advice more broadly across this market.

Demand for high performance will continue 
to strengthen 
What is clear through this evolution is the 
need to provide investment solutions that 
deliver on the promise. There is now clear 
water between the provision of cheap passive 
or synthetic solutions and the delivery of 
higher margin and higher return strategies. 
The lower returning active solutions have 
largely been driven out of the market, 
with this process of natural selection being 
positive for the industry as a whole. This is 
a direct result of the FCA’s drive to ensure 
that we embrace consultative engagement 
with our clients and deliver what they need 
as opposed to ‘build and sell’ products at 
the highest margin regardless of outcome.

We have exceptionally strong investment 
manufacturing capability and, as a result, all 
but one of our products and solutions have 
delivered significant outperformance against 
their reference benchmark since inception. 
There have been few asset managers that 
can claim this level of consistency across 
multiple asset classes. Mike has discussed 
our focus on R&D and this will continue to 
grow in importance over the next few years, 
with much of the genesis of the solutions 
emerging from our response to fiduciary 
needs or our broader client base. The mantra 
is that we must be relevant and excellent 
as this is what our market demands.

18

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

OPERATING BUSINESS REVIEW CONTINUED

How clients ‘buy’ this performance will 
become more tailored 
Our industry has been driven by the desire to 
mass customise products. The belief is that 
this is the route to operational gearing, as the 
same solution can be sold to multiple clients 
regardless of need. Whilst we recognise that 
many clients share similar challenges we 
would also like to be in the position where we 
can ‘build to order’ for many of them over the 
coming years. This can only be effective for 
both us and our clients if first we understand 
the need and if the solution is of sufficient 
scale to warrant the initial investment. 

The changes highlighted above in terms of 
how the industry is orientated and evolving 
facilitates this outcome. The increased 
trend we see for internalisation and the 
establishment of CIOs in more than just name 
provides fertile soil for a business such as ours. 
The existence of our Fiduciary Management 
division equips us with the intellectual 
understanding of many of the challenges that 
our clients’ CIOs are facing. Consequently, 
we are able to engage with them on a 
familiar footing and it is this recognition that 
allows our business to develop the trusted 
investment partnership relationship that 
our clients and the evolving market seek.

We see this trend clearly in Australia and the 
UK. The US to a certain extent is already there. 
In many instances it is a very sophisticated 
market with high quality internal CIOs across 
a range of asset owners from pension funds 
through to endowments and family offices. We 
have continued to invest in our US franchise 
and the recruitment of high quality individuals 
from Mercer to establish our New York office 
is the latest example. We are engaging with a 
range of institutions which recognise our clear 
competitive edge in providing them with the 
insights that they seek. The role of an internal 
CIO is often a lonely existence, and the access 
to high quality investment views and advice 
from an organisation which faces many similar 
challenges will become increasing valued. 

THESE THEMES DRIVE OUR FOCUS
Four years after the IPO, the combination 
of our revenue lines provides the Group 
with many opportunities and whilst this last 
year has seen a number of factors suppress 
demand, I look forward to the next four 
years with a high degree of optimism and 
excitement. Our investment strategies 
and solutions are relevant to our clients’ 
needs and provide excellent outcomes, 
and I am confident that we can meet 
the priorities that Mike has established 
for the Group and continue to grow our 
complementary and diverse revenue lines. 

FIDUCIARY MANAGEMENT AND 
ADVISORY
Fiduciary management and advisory 
solutions are often two sides of the same 
coin – the provision of support in making 
investment decisions. We often think of 
a process whereby the most important 
decision for a client is to choose their primary 
investment partner, and then define the 
engagement model which best suits their 
needs at the time. However, this may well 
change over time as their needs evolve.

The difference between the two approaches 
is that advisory leaves the client with 
the discretion to choose whether to 
action the advice given; whereas in a 
fiduciary management engagement fuller 
discretion is ceded to the Group under 
a defined governance framework.

There are various reasons that a client 
would choose one approach over the 
other, but one of the key advantages of 
fiduciary management is that it provides a 
level of investment responsiveness that it 
is hard for Trustees of schemes to achieve 
without an internal team to replicate it. 
This was seen during the EU referendum for 
example, where the Group was highly active 
in the market on the day of results based 
on advance planning for the investment 
implications of potential outcomes.

This year has seen generally stable revenue 
and AUM levels from both divisions, 
resulting from two main dynamics:

–  First, positive investment returns across a 

wide range of asset classes in recent history 
has led to a suppressed demand for change 
from prospective clients – essentially when 
there is limited uncertainty, the drive to 
seek change in advice or investment support 
is reduced as people do not perceive a 
problem to solve. This is a dynamic which we 
would expect to change quickly if markets 
start to fall, or specific shocks are 
introduced which require response; and

–  Second, we have seen a much reduced level 
of new fiduciary business coming to tender 
in the last year, due we believe to clients 
taking a wait-and-see approach to the CMA 
market review. Now that the provisional 
findings have been released, we expect 
activity to return to a more normal level  
over the next year.

Looking ahead, we believe that UK advisory 
revenues will remain stable as we expect 
structural factors to continue to suppress 
demand for advisory services – both in terms 
of a likely direction of travel towards fiduciary 
for small and medium-sized schemes; and as 
a result of the regulatory changes trailed by 

the CMA leading to a period of adaptation 
for the market more generally. This is not 
to say that we will not see some specific 
increases in project fees as trading conditions 
become more turbulent and negative. The 
US however could provide stronger growth, 
as we leverage our recently acquired senior 
consulting capability to drive new business. 

Fiduciary Management, on the other hand, 
should be a source of strong growth in the 
medium term, even if it remains slower 
for the next six months (as the increased 
tender demand takes time to move to fully-
funded mandates). This is because we see 
the provisional output of the CMA being 
supportive to some of our competitive 
advantages and the increased tender volumes 
from the largest consultancies adding 
further growth opportunities. We also see 
nascent prospects in the US and Australia 
for our offerings (which tend to be described 
in those markets as ‘outsource CIO’).

DERIVATIVE SOLUTIONS
Derivatives are tools that allow investors 
to pick and choose where they take risk 
to earn return and where they manage 
risks that they cannot afford.

These properties make them a highly effective 
tool for pension schemes looking to manage 
two sides of a balance sheet – assets that need 
to grow in a steady way and liabilities, the cost 
of securing which is volatile.

River and Mercantile Derivatives (RMD) aims 
to manage strategies to meet this need and 
focuses primarily on two types of derivative 
strategy – Liability Driven Investment (LDI) 
and Structured Equity.

LDI
LDI is about allowing clients to manage liability 
risk, using derivatives, whilst still allowing 
them to target return. It is now seen as a 
mainstream component of investment 
strategy with 50% (about £1,000bn) of 
liabilities now hedged according to the  
XPS LDI survey 2018. 

Whilst 50% of the liabilities have been 
hedged this is spread across only circa 2,000 
mandates (there are over 5,000 pension 
schemes in the UK). This puts the current 
average LDI mandate size at approximately 
£500m, illustrating that a large element of the 
growth to date has been in larger schemes. 
RMD’s speciality is making derivatives 
mandates accessible to all schemes including 
those below £500m in bespoke rather than 
pooled form. This provides better matching 
against liabilities and is more efficient from 
a collateral perspective. It is RMD’s ability 
to tailor each strategy to suit client’s needs 
that makes it unique in the industry.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

19

a robust franchise with a broad research 
platform, a unique culture, a distinctive 
brand, and proven and sustainable results.

The key to continuity is sound succession 
planning and it is important when developing 
talented investors to provide them with 
sufficient investment flexibility to express 
their views, generate performance for 
clients and differentiate their strategies 
from competing products. Our PVT and 
ILC investment processes allow portfolio 
managers to manage our clients’ capital 
within a robust framework of quantitative 
as well as qualitative fundamental research. 
This framework, in combination with the 
experience and knowledge of our lead 
investors (each with over 20 years in the 
investment management industry), delivers 
a repeatable and importantly teachable 
investment process for picking stocks and 
building portfolios. This in turn allows new 
generations of investment talent to be 
brought through first as analysts but then as 
portfolio managers in their own right, each 
adopting the same consistent investment 
process to express their own investment views.

This year, Dan Hanbury is once again 
bringing his experience to bear on the 
UK Smaller Companies Strategy and Will 
Lough – who was the team’s first graduate 
hire almost 10 years ago – stepped up to 
manage the UK Dynamic Equity Fund, 
an active large cap focused strategy.

George Ensor – who joined the team 
five years ago – is now managing the UK 
Microcap Investment Company. Both 
Will and George have been close to, and 
contributed to, these strategies for several 
years prior to talking on these roles. 

The measure of our successful continuity is 
evidenced by a further performance fee in 
July 2018 from our UK Micro Cap Investment 
Company and the high analyst coverage of 
all the stock names across our fund range. 
After 12 years (to June 2018), each of our 
PVT investment strategies is ahead of its 
benchmark and peer group since inception 
and it is this established track record on 
which we are aiming to build further with 
future generations of investment talent, 
for both existing and future clients.

Over the last 12 months, LDI growth has 
been driven by the sub-£500m schemes, 
with RMD’s LDI client numbers growing by 
20%, as well as existing clients extending 
their mandates. RMD has also seen 
growth spread across intermediaries and 
now has clients advised by the majority 
of the major investment consultants.

RMD’s positioning and success has been 
recognised in LDI awards. There are five major 
awards within the LDI market – RMD has won 
three and were commended or in the top three 
in two others. In every one of those five cases 
making tailored solutions available to smaller 
schemes was cited as a stand out service.

Structured Equity
Structured Equity uses equity derivatives to 
allow clients to shape their equity exposure. 
Less experienced users might see this as 
simply protecting from equity market falls 
by capping returns. However, RMD is unique 
in that it has significant equity derivatives 
trading experience, meaning that it can more 
appropriately tailor and adapt Structured 
Equity to other situations. For example:

–  As a portfolio completion tool where it is 

designed with the entire scheme strategy  
in mind;

–  As a diversifier from other equity-like assets;

–  As a re-risking tool after a market fall  

(2009 saw significant Structured Equity 
activity); and

–  Implemented synthetically such that the 

Structured Equity mandate provides shaped 
equity exposure whilst also providing a 
collateral pool for LDI and other derivative 
positions – which is of critical importance to 
entities needing to earn return whilst also 
manage risk at the same time.

It is RMDs ability to tailor each strategy to suit 
client’s needs that we believe makes it unique 
in the industry.

Looking ahead, we are seeing strong growth in 
demand for Structured Equity services across 
the corporate pension scheme market. The 
investment we have made in our technology 
and engagement capabilities has meant that 
we are seeing growing adoption of the concept 
of SE and LDI amongst an increasing number 
of the asset consultants, and with it greater 
acceptance of the benefits and flexibility that 
derivatives offer clients across the size range. 

Pension schemes without LDI will find 
themselves also needing a higher level of 
return as well as needing to manage risk. 
Integrating Structured Equity with LDI is a 
simple and capital efficient way to meet this 
need. We would expect to see intermediaries 
recognise this in the coming years and as 
a result, to see growth in such mandates. 
Indeed, almost all of the new Structured 
Equity mandates that we executed in the last 
year were implemented for clients that already 
had LDI (or put LDI in place at the same time). 

In addition, within Local Government 
Pension Schemes (LGPS) who are generally 
new to derivatives and with governance 
challenges similar to smaller private sector 
schemes, RMD is seen as the market leader 
in Structured Equity solutions. In a market 
where we are competing against the biggest 
asset managers in the world this is an area 
in which we are continuing to invest and 
one in which we are held in high regard by 
the investment community more generally 
for providing market leading training, 
design, execution and client service.

We have executed a large number of 
significant transactions in the last 12 months, 
and the investment in training amongst our 
client base we believe, places us in a very 
strong position going forward. From the 
early days when our derivatives capabilities 
were purely an internal solution for our 
Fiduciary and Advisory clients, a much broader 
opportunity now exists. We now work with 
13 other intermediaries and a growing 
number of non-advised clients directly. 

The opportunity to develop our capabilities 
in overseas markets where the need for 
these solutions will increase significantly 
is very exciting. We believe that other 
markets such as the US are showing signs 
that they will de-risk their liabilities more 
quickly and more aggressively than we 
have seen in the UK. This will provide an 
exciting opportunity for RMD as we increase 
our investment in our US footprint. 

The Australian market is still firmly in 
accumulation phase, however the use 
of derivatives is low in comparison to 
other geographies and our early stage 
conversations there are promising. 

EQUITY SOLUTIONS
We believe that equities businesses 
constructed through well designed investment 
teams brings stability and repeatability to 
investment where cycles and uncertainty 
normally exist and where consistently 
good outcomes are rare. Combining 
investment manager independence with 
a disciplined investment process provides 
the right balance in terms of delivering 
accountability for investment performance. 

PVT
Our PVT team is an excellent example of an 
investment franchise purposefully developed 
over time. From the outset, we sought to 
design a repeatable investment process 
focused on systematically identifying sources 
of shareholder value creation or Potential, 
in combination with rigorous Valuation and 
Timing tools (hence PVT). Our Industrial 
Life Cycle (ILC) team has a similar ethos 
focussing on identifying exciting investment 
opportunities across the business life 
cycle. We have also identified and hired 
talented people who couple a passion for 
investing with a tireless work ethic. That 
process and those people have evolved into 

20

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

OPERATING BUSINESS REVIEW CONTINUED

ILC 
The addition of the ILC team in June 2017 
fits well with the Group’s growth plans by 
adding emerging market equity capabilities. 
The ILC team shares a similar investment 
philosophy to the PVT team, namely building 
portfolios through a unique bottom-up 
stock selection process. The ILC investment 
process, which was developed in 2006 by 
current members of the team Al Bryant and 
Sudin Poddar, forms the basis for a durable 
and repeatable investment process. 

The ILC process utilises a proprietary objective 
rule set to classify the universe of more than 
4,000 emerging market companies into one 
of five categories; Growth, Cash Cow, Fading 
Winner, Restructuring and Financials. These 
categories correspond with a company’s 
stage of corporate maturity. Stage specific 
screens are applied to each category in order 
to identify companies that are being managed 
in a manner consistent with the creation of 
shareholder value for the life cycle stage. 
Broadly, Growth and Cash Cow companies 
need to grow their cash flow and reinvest 
the proceeds profitably. Fading Winner 
and Restructuring stage companies must 
shift focus from growth to prudent capital 
management, restoring balance sheet health 
and divesting underperforming projects. 
Financials are a distinct grouping where 
value creation is dependent upon effective 
use of leverage to fund profitable growth.

We have talked about the importance of being 
investment relevant and providing investment 
excellence. Part of this is understanding 
our clients’ needs and the role we play in 
their portfolios. We continue to ensure 
our investment teams, as well as the wider 
Group,work closely with the distribution and 
client service teams, and our clients to be true 
to this objective. We take our responsibilities 
seriously in delivering for all of our key 
stakeholders, most notably our clients, our 
regulators and of course our future investment 
talent in order to provide growing, robust 
and repeatable returns to our shareholders.

In the PVT team, all the portfolio managers 
are supported by a team of fundamental 
research analysts including Charles Benett, 
our Head of Quantitative Analysis and 
Mayan Uthayakumar, Director of Research, 
alongside Eduard Hernandez and Anna 
Pugh. In addition, they receive stewardship 
guidance from Gary Dowsett, Director of 
ESG who, with over 30 years investment 
management experience, has helped bring 
to the team an approach further embracing 
socially responsible investment principles. 

Applying the philosophy and process originally 
designed by Hugh Sergeant and Dan Hanbury, 
the PVT team currently manages over £4 billion 
in eight investment strategies for clients located 
around the world. In the past year, the majority 
of UK and global funds were broadly in line 
with their benchmarks but over longer periods 
performance remained strong. Performance 
drag was primarily due to the re-emergence of 
a strong late cycle growth trend and away from 
value stocks where most of our funds are over 
represented. However, the portfolio managers 
remain excited by the potential in their 
portfolios that has resulted from depressed 
valuations relating to Brexit as well as fears 
of a domestic recession, together with record 
value spreads globally observed as a result of a 
ten-year period of unprecedented monetary, 
and more latterly in the US, fiscal policy. 

The PVT team has grown strongly over the 
last 12 months in spite of the setback from 
the dismissal of a portfolio manager. We 
would also suggest that developing investors 
into teams and teams into a franchise is 
individualised and personal. With unique 
portfolio managers, no two paths will be the 
same. That is evident in the diversity – in terms 
of investment philosophy, team structure 
and culture – among all of our investment 
teams, including our newest Emerging Market 
Industrial Lifecycle team. We believe it is 
telling how a business copes with adversity 
and the professionalism that it demonstrates 
when so doing, and the teams have continued 
to remain focused on delivering strong relative 
investment performance for our clients. 

We have continued to see strong growth 
and our global strategies have continued to 
win business in the UK, US, Australia and 
New Zealand. In response to this we have 
continued to expand our platform to reflect 
the growing globalisation of our client base. 
We have launched an Australian domiciled 
Unit Trust platform and we are in the process 
of creating similar structures in the US.

DISTRIBUTION
I have described earlier in this section the 
background to our business and over the 
last few pages how our investment business 
and revenue lines are structured and have 
performed over the last 12 months. A key 
part in that process is our engagement with 
our clients. We have recently changed the 
structure of our business moving away from 
the orientation of our distribution along 
divisional lines of Asset Management and 
Solutions. This covers not just the initial 
engagement process with our clients but 
also the on-going client service that we 
provide. I have always believed that these 
two important facets are not siloes where 
clients are passed from one team to another 
based on the specific stage in the engagement 
process. Relationships built over time require 
nurturing and servicing and that is not best 
served by a structure that severs the link once 
that relationship formally becomes a client.

A strong year despite non-investment 
related headwinds
As Mike highlighted in his CEO’s review, 
our revenue lines will perform differently 
depending on the stage of economic cycle. 
The environment over the last 12 months 
favours our Equities and Derivatives business 
lines and our Advisory and Fiduciary 
businesses have been more muted. There 
have been other non-investment factors 
that have influenced our revenue lines. The 
distribution growth headlines are as follows:

–  We have seen a strong period of growth 
from our Equities business and they have 
increased management fee revenue by 41% 
during the period. This is in spite of the 
dismissal of a portfolio manager and whilst 
we anticipated some asset reduction, we 
were encouraged by the support that we 
have received from the market and 
investors’ continued belief in our PVT 
investment approach. The arrival of the ILC 
team further consolidates our strong 
position in this market;

–  We saw very strong gross sales in our 

Derivatives business, however revenue 
growth was only 8% during the year as a 
result of higher than normal redemptions. 
The main factor was the maturity of a large 
structured equity mandate where the client 
has not immediately rolled the mandate into 
a new structure. Mandates not rolling is 
relatively rare, and it may well be that it rolls 
back on at some point (we remain appointed 
by the client); and

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

21

River and Mercantile has little business risk 
associated with a departure, however there is 
still a certain degree of uncertainty associated 
with the nature of the exit. Our clients are 
mainly based in the UK, US, Australia and 
New Zealand, although we do have two 
institutional clients based in mainland Europe 
and we have fund platforms in Dublin and 
Luxembourg, with the latter coming with a 
number of wealth management clients. This 
provides us with options surrounding future 
growth plans. We will continue to monitor 
developments and plan accordingly, and we 
will keep you abreast of any required changes. 

The alterations to our existing relationship 
with the European Union may however 
bring some unexpected windfalls for fund 
managers with institutional quality UK 
equity strategies. The majority of European 
banks and wealth managers invest on a 
pan-European basis and we are beginning to 
see signs that this may change following a 
departure. It would be foolish for any investor 
to structurally ignore a market as large as 
the UK considering its globalised equity 
benchmark, and whilst this would no longer 
be part of a broader European index cohort, 
having separate direct exposure to UK equity 
mandates is a solution some investors may 
consider and have already discussed with us.

In summary
Our operating businesses have continued to 
deliver strong returns for our clients in line 
with our expectations and we strive to meet 
the strategic demands that our CEO and the 
Chairman have set for the business. We have, 
and will continue to look at, opportunities 
to strengthen our offering, whether this is 
delivered through organic or inorganic means. 
I would like to take the opportunity to thank 
all of our clients for their continued support.

James Barham
Deputy Chief Executive Officer

–  As we would expect at this stage of the  

cycle our Fiduciary and Advisory businesses 
have been relatively flat for the year. The 
reduction in the level of activity has been 
compounded by the on-going CMA market 
investigation however, the interim findings 
have been encouraging for our business and 
we were pleased to see that many of our 
suggestions had been picked up by the 
investigatory team and formed part of the 
remedial steps recommended in the interim 
report. We do expect to see a return to  
more normalised activity levels over the 
coming year and whilst there has been no 
immediate change to the economic climate, 
we do see a build-up of the investment risks 
that will lead to a recovery in demand for our 
advisory and fiduciary services. The increase 
in pitching opportunities as a result of the 
CMA review will feed through in time and  
we would expect to see the impact of this  
in 2019.

We continue to invest in and broaden our 
distribution
We have invested in distribution over the 
last 12 months in both the US through the 
ILC team transaction and more directly in 
Australia with the recruitment of Tim Horan. I 
have described earlier the changing dynamics 
of the Australian institutional marketplace and 
the opportunities this presents to a business 
such as ours. We have been developing this 
market over the last four or five years and 
building out our relationships and credibility. 
We are now running in excess of AUD$1bn 
in the region and it was clear to us that to 
maintain this development and to take 
advantage of the opportunities, we needed to 
open an office in the region. We were delighted 
that we were able to recruit Tim Horan from 
Westpac and have opened an office. Tim 
headed the sports and entertainment business 
in Private and Premium Banking at Westpac 
for more than seven years. Prior to this, he 
was head of capital raising at Meridian Funds 
Management. Tim needs little introduction 
as he was one of the leading rugby players of 
his generation, represented the Australian 
Rugby team (Wallabies) over 80 times and was 
part of the team that won the Rugby World 
Cup in 1991 and 1999. We will work with 
Tim in Australia to develop our business and 
we intend over time to build an investment 
manufacturing presence in the region.

Continued development
We continue to examine our options 
regarding the US. We have distribution 
capabilities based in Chicago co-located 
with our emerging market equities business 

(ILC team) headed by Will Sly and also from 
an investment solutions perspective our 
team based in Boston. The US is a significant 
market and over the next 12 months we 
will be looking at how we can best resource 
our distribution ambitions in this region.

As described earlier, our UK distribution 
was orientated on divisional lines. In Asset 
Management we have a strong Wholesale 
team led by Mark Thomas and an Institutional 
team led by Arabella Townshend supported 
by a Client Servicing team led by Alexandra 
Wilding-Jones. In our Solutions business, 
new business development is led by Lara 
Edmonstone-West and Kate Finch and the 
client servicing is undertaken within the 
investment teams. We have decided that 
it is in the best interest of our clients that 
we coordinate our distribution and support 
functions as one entity. In addition we will 
invest in this team over the coming year to 
ensure that they are properly resourced to take 
advantage of the various opportunities in the 
market more broadly, as well as those specific 
to the Fiduciary business that will emerge 
post the CMA investigation into the industry.

Effectively targeted marketing
We believe that selective and targeted use of 
PR and social media can often be as successful, 
and in certain circumstances create more of 
a powerful impact than an expensive blanket 
advertising plan. Scott Nicholson, our Group 
Head of Marketing and his team have ensured 
that the business is well represented in the 
media and that our investment views are 
presented directly into our key audience 
groups. Our client quarterly reports have 
always been highly regarded and we operate 
a process of continuous improvement to 
ensure that we provide our clients with 
detailed understanding of their investments 
with the respective parts of our business.

Our membership of the European Union
Much has been written about our continued 
membership of the European Union 
following the UK referendum in 2016. The 
trigger date of March 2019 is fast looming 
on most businesses horizons, either as 
a date that has cast a shadow over their 
activities for some time or just another 
date in the Gregorian calendar, with this 
attitude being dependent on either one’s 
political views or business activity. I do not 
believe this is the place to espouse personal 
views however from a business perspective 
it is important that we are cognisant of the 
potential impact on our existing business 
and potential future development.

22

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CASE STUDY

FOCUSED ON CLIENT 
OUTCOMES 

In this case study we 
demonstrate how we have 
worked with a fiduciary 
management client to 
implement an effective 
investment strategy to  
meet their needs.

The strategy has evolved over time to now 
target full funding on a low risk self-sufficiency 
basis by 2029. This client’s success has been 
driven by strong investment performance, 
the design and implementation of a mandate 
to manage their growing cash flow needs, 
as well as strong relationships between the 
Trustees, Sponsor and their advisors. 

We were initially appointed as investment 
advisor to the scheme in August 2013. The 
Trustees liked that we were able to offer 
them a bespoke service, and they could 
implement a solution through either an 
advisory or fiduciary approach; at the time 
the Trustees weren’t sure which engagement 
model best met their needs. Their strategy 
had a high exposure to equity markets which 
we felt could be diversified across other 
asset classes to better manage risk. Liability 
risk was also not managed as effectively 
as it could be, meaning their funding level 
was volatile and impeding their ability 
to plan their journey to full funding.

2013: INITIAL ASSET ALLOCATION AT
CLIENT TAKE-ON

Following this review, the Trustees’ took the 
decision to adopt a fiduciary relationship 
with us. This was driven by their desire for 
a more sophisticated investment strategy. 
As part of this, we educated the board 
on liability hedging and they agreed to 
put an extended mandate in place which 
increased their hedging ratio to 75%1. This 
was important to protect the portfolio 
to interest rate and inflation shocks. 

The scheme’s growth assets were 
subsequently moved to our fiduciary solution: 
a multi-asset, highly diversified and dynamic 
portfolio. The liability hedge was also set to a 
bespoke portfolio of gilts and swaps. The one 
year 5% value at risk measure in the strategy 
fell by 18% as a result of these changes.

2014: INITIAL ALLOCATION TO THE
FIDUCIARY PORTFOLIO

SCHEME SIZE: 

£631m

ENGAGEMENT MODEL: 

Fiduciary 

Liability
Hedge
34%

Liability
Liability
Liability
Hedge
Hedge
Hedge
75%
75%
75%

Equity 
Multi-asset 
Bonds 

51%
9%
40%

We immediately focused on better 
managing their growth assets to protect 
the portfolio from market shocks whilst we 
undertook a detailed strategy review. 

Growth 
Off-risk 

60%
40%

Notes: Liability hedging level estimated as a percentage of the 
technical provisions basis liabilities.

Subsequently, market conditions were 
challenging, in particular the continued 
decline of UK interest rates, however the 
higher levels of liability hedging for the 
scheme helped immunise this impact. 

This coupled with strong returns from the 
growth portfolio, (returning 10.4% p.a. from 
inception up to the 2016 valuation date) helped 
to improve the funding level of the scheme 
to 99% on the technical provisions basis. 
Continued strong performance soon meant 
a funding level of over 100% was achieved. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

23

The focus of the Trustees, and sponsor, 
subsequently moved to targeting 
self-sufficiency by 2029; whilst 
simultaneously protecting full funding 
on a technical provisions basis. 

To protect the 100% funding level we:

–  Reduced the allocation to growth assets 

–  Increased the liability hedge to 100% 

–  Designed and implemented a brand new 

building block of cash flow matching credit.

2017: DE-RISKING AND CASH FLOW
MATCHING CREDIT

Liability
Hedge
100%

Growth 
Off-risk 
Credit 

38%
54%
8%

The implementation of the cash flow 
matching credit mandate meant the Trustees 
were able to manage the growing cash 
requirements of the scheme more efficiently 
now sponsor contributions had ceased. We 
designed a credit mandate constructed of 
high quality credit, with a low probability 
of default and high certainty of return. 

Due to our in-house liability hedging 
capability we have been able to integrate the 
credit allocation into the scheme’s liability 
hedge meaning we have firm control and 
understanding of all assets that provide 
liability hedging characteristics to the scheme. 

2029: THE END GOAL: SELF-SUFFICIENCY
PORTFOLIO

Liability
Hedge
100%

Growth 
Off-risk 

60%
40%

Over time we have evolved the design 
of the portfolio with the future asset 
allocation of the scheme in mind, where we 
anticipate a de-risked portfolio comprised 
only of credit, gilts and a liability hedge 
overlay as shown in the following chart. 

Today the scheme is 104% funded on the 
technical provisions basis, which equates to 
a self-sufficiency basis funding level of 96%2. 
Monitoring the journey to self-sufficiency, we 
will continue to move the portfolio towards 
its target allocation, thereby achieving 
continued de-risking but also meeting the 
growing cash flow needs of the scheme.

The Trustees have been pleased with the 
outcomes raised to date for the scheme; we 
have spent time understanding and developing 
solutions that have helped their evolving 
needs. Our design of an innovative credit 
mandate to meet their drive towards self-
sufficiency has been key. Collectively, both we 
and the Trustees we look forward to moving 
closer to their funding target over time. 

Notes: 
1. Estimated by R&M Solutions as a percentage of the technical 

provisions liabilities. 

2. Estimated by R&M Solutions as at 31 December 2013.

Interest rate liability hedge design
Change £’000s for 0.01% change in interest rates (’PV01’)

400

200

0

-200

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50+

Gilts
Swaps
Total return swaps
Credit  

Years

Our advisors at  
R&M Solutions have 
many strengths and 
qualities, not least 
they demonstrate to a 
great degree that they 
totally understand the 
investment market.

Scheme Trustee

Their investment 
performance has been 
excellent and our fund 
has increased.

I absolutely cannot 
fault R&M Solutions’ 
performance. They are 
a brilliant team and a 
breath of fresh air as 
our new advisors.

24

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS (KPIs)

The 2018 KPIs reflect a lower activity 
level in Fiduciary Management and 
Advisory, and the loss of AUM in the 
second half of the year as a result of 
dismissing a portfolio manager.

1 Growth in fee earning AUM/NUM

9% 22% 22% 21%

Fee earning AUM/NUM

2018

2017

2016

2015

£33,843m

£31,049m

£25,548m

£21,017m

The growth in AUM/NUM is a key indicator of the client 
engagement process and is the driver for growth in net 
management fees. The growth in AUM/NUM is a function of 
new mandates (including acquisitions), low attrition rates, 
aggregate investment performance and net rebalance.

In 2018 the growth in fee earning AUM was below historical 
levels due to Structured Equity maturities and redemptions 
relating to the dismissal of a portfolio manager. The business 
continues to have significant excess AUM/NUM capacity in 
existing and new strategies.

2

Regretted institutional attrition 
(RIA)

3 Growth in net management and 

advisory fees 

8% 3% 4% 1%

15% 22% -2% 33%

Regetted institutional attrition 

Net management and advisory fees 

2018

2017

2016

2015

8%

3%

4%

1%

2018

2017

2016

2015

£64.2m

£55.9m

£45.7m

£46.7m

Net management and advisory fees represent the underlying 
revenues generated by the business. This metric measures 
the sustainability of the business.

While the growth in AUM/NUM was below our historical 
trend, the growth in net management and advisory fees was 
above our medium-term strategic target of 12% as a result 
prior year embedded growth, and mix shift towards higher 
margin divisions.

RIA is calculated as the opening AUM/NUM of lost 
institutional clients, divided by total opening AUM/NUM.  
It excludes pension clients which have entered the Pension 
Protection Fund due to sponsor default or pensions who have 
moved to buy-in or buy-out, and redemptions arising from 
fund benefit payments. 

RIA is not directly measured for Equity Solutions Wholesale 
as investor redemption decisions tend to be driven by their 
asset allocation and investment performance outcomes. 

A low client attrition is a measure of our client engagement 
process results in higher net growth in AUM/NUM and 
efficiency gains in the cost of distribution.

The Group’s RIA varies from year to year but continues to  
be low when compared to traditional asset managers. It 
increased in the current year due to a single large (£1.4bn) 
structured equity mandate which reached maturity and was 
not replaced, although we remain appointed. Excluding this 
item, RIA is 3%, consistent with prior periods.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

25

Earnings and dividends

2018

2017

2016

2015

Adjusted underlying EPS (basic)

16.0p

15.9p

10.6p

12.8p

Net performance fee EPS (basic)

5.9p

7.0p

1.0p

2.6p

Adjusted EPS (basic)

21.9p

22.9p

11.6p

15.4p

Interim dividend paid

Declared second interim dividend

Proposed final dividend

7.6p

5.5p

5.5p

5.6p

8.1p

6.0p

Total dividend for the year

18.6p

19.7p

Percentage of adjusted underlying 
profit distributed

80%

80%

3.6p

3.4p

2.5p

9.5p

80%

4.6p

4.6p

3.8p

13.0p

80%

Percentage of net performance 
fee profit distributed

Percentage of adjusted EPS 
distributed

100%

100%

100%

100%

85%

86%

82%

83%

Adjusted profit before tax to statutory profit reconciliation

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

64

14

34

11

5

0.5

0.2

16

22

5

1

0.1

18

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Less remuneration at 50%

Adjusted profit before tax

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

depreciation and finance 

Adjusted underlying profit 

Statutory profit before tax

1

2

3

4

5

6

Net management and 
advisory fees

Administrative expenses

Underlying remuneration

Amortisation of software, 
depreciation and finance 
income

Adjusted underlying profit 
before tax

Performance fees

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Less remuneration at 50%

Gain on disposal of AFS

Adjusted profit before tax

Amortisation of intangible 
assets and IMAs

Other income

EPSP costs

Statutory profit before tax

4 Adjusted underlying pre-tax 

margin1

25% 29% 24% 27%

Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin

2018

2017

2016

2015

25%

29%

24%

27%

Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin is an indication of the 
ability to achieve scale through increased AUM/NUM and 
revenues, at a lower marginal increase in related expenses. 

Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin was lower as a result of 
cost increases from regulatory change, as well as investments 
in, primarily, the ILC team and additional hiring made during 
the year. These investments create increased opportunity to 
organically grow our revenue in future periods. Excluding  
the costs and revenues of: the ILC team; the New York and 
Australian offices; and external research costs, the margin  
is 28%.

1. See glossary.

5

Percentage of adjusted earnings 
per share distributed

Adjusted profit before tax to statutory profit reconciliation

85% 86% 82% 83%

70

64

14

34

60
Percentage of adjusted earnings per share distibuted
50
2018
40
2017
30
2016
20
2015

0.2

0.5

22

16

11

1

5

5

18.6p

19.7p

9.5p
0.1
13.0p

18

7

3

5

1

2

4

8

9

10

10
The Group’s dividend policy is to pay at least 60% of the 
Group’s adjusted underlying profits available for distribution 
6
13
by way of ordinary dividends. In addition, the Group expects 
to generate surplus capital over time, primarily from net 
performance fee earnings. The Group intends to distribute 
such available surpluses, after taking into account regulatory 
capital requirements at the time and potential strategic 
opportunities, to shareholders primarily by way of  
special dividends.

12

11

During the years 2015-2018 the Group has paid 80% of 
adjusted underlying profits and 100% of net performance fee 
profits as dividends. The year-on-year variation of adjusted 
earnings being distributed is a result of the ratio of net 
performance fees to adjusted underlying profits.

Adjusted profit is calculated on a consistent basis each year. 
Further information can be found in note 14 to the 
consolidated financial statements.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

FINANCIAL REVIEW

Strong organic growth and selective investments to broaden our 
distribution, and build research and development capabilities

–  Statutory profit after tax of 
£15.1m, an increase of 13%

–  Statutory EPS increased 14%

–  Fee earning AUM/NUM 

increased by 9%

–  Net management and advisory 

fees increased by 15%

–  Adjusted underlying pre-tax 

margin 25%

–  Adjusted basic EPS reduced 

5%. 

Kevin Hayes
Chief Financial Officer

AUM/NUM AND MARGINS
We have continued to grow AUM/NUM through both positive net flows and investment performance. Net management fee margin levels have 
been broadly maintained across all divisions. The growth of our net management fee revenue results from the growth of our AUM/NUM, and the 
stability of our management fee margins charged to clients.

Positive net flows are an indication of both our ability to retain previously mandated assets, and our ability to win new mandates and increase 
allocations from existing client mandates.

The following table shows the AUM/NUM for the year ended 30 June 2018:

Assets Under Management (AUM) and Notional Under Management (NUM)

£’m

Opening fee earning AUM/NUM
Sales
Redemptions

Net rebalance and transfers

Net flow

Investment performance

Closing fee earning AUM/NUM

Mandates in transition 
Redemptions in transition

Total mandated AUM/NUM

Opening mandated AUM/NUM
Increase in fee earning assets
Increase in mandated assets

Average fee earning AUM/NUM
Average margin 2018 (bps)
Average margin 2017 (bps)
Medium term margin guidance (bps)
Net management fees 2018 £m

1  Transferred in on acquisition of ILC team.

Fiduciary 
Management

10,528
535
(419)

116
(280)

(164)

278

Derivative 
Solutions 
(NUM)

16,888
3,855
(3,094)

761
973

1,734

–

10,642

18,622

Equity Solutions

Wholesale

Institutional

Total

1,812
583
(194)

389
2801

669

211

3,633
1,309
(1,041)

268
280

548

398

Total AUM/
NUM

31,049
5,699
(4,554)

1,145
973

2,118

676

2,692

4,579

33,843

1,821
726
(847)

(121)
–

(121)

187

1,887

12
(49)

12
(18)

–
–

188
–

188
–

212
(67)

10,605

18,616

1,887

2,880

4,767

33,988

10,526
1.1%
0.8%

10,677
17-18
17-18
16-17
18.4

16,316
10.3%
14.1%

17,040
6-7
6-7
6-7
11.8

1,821
3.6%
3.6%

2,058
70-71
71-72
66-68
14.5

1,812
48.6%
58.9%

2,349
39-40
41-42
39-40
9.3

3,633
26.0%
31.2%

4,407
53-54
56-57

30,475
9.0%
11.5%

32,124
17
16

23.8

54.0

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

27

This year has seen a record level of gross sales at £5.7bn, a year-on-year 
increase of 12%. However, this has been partly offset by higher levels of 
redemptions in Derivatives Solutions and Equity Solutions Wholesale.

Of our gross sales of £5.7bn during the year, £3.2bn was from new 
clients, and £2.5bn was from increased allocations and new mandates 
from existing clients. The ability to grow through our existing clients  
is an indication of positive client satisfaction through delivering  
against client outcomes and gives the business an overall lower cost  
of client engagement.

Investment performance added £0.7bn to AUM. Within Fiduciary 
Management, 3.6% performance was generated from the bond-based 
matching fund and -0.7% from risk assets. 

Overall divisional margins have remained consistent with our medium 
term guidance. Our overall margin increased by one basis point 
reflecting the increase in higher margin Equity Solutions AUM during 
the year. 

REGRETTED INSTITUTIONAL ATTRITION (RIA)
Our business model is focused on meeting our clients’ investment 
needs. Our engagement approach results in an alignment between  
the investment strategy and the clients’ desired range of investment 
outcomes. Our aim through this approach is to achieve higher levels of 
client satisfaction and therefore lower redemption rates. We measure 
this by RIA. 

£m

Gross outflows
Opening AUM/NUM
Outflow %
RIA 2018

RIA 2017

Fiduciary 
Management

Derivative 
Solutions

Equity 
Solutions 
– Institutional

419
10,528
4%
0.2%

1%

3,094
16,888
18%
14%

4%

194
1,812
11%
0.3%

12%

Total

3,707
29,228
13%
8%

3%

Derivative Solutions’ RIA increased this year as the result of a large 
mandate which reached its contractual maturity date. We remain 
appointed by the client, however the structure has not been replaced. 
Excluding this item, RIA is 3% which is consistent with prior periods.

REVENUE
Total revenues increased 9% to £74.8 million with strong growth in 
management fees, being partially offset by lower performance fees.

Net management and advisory revenues increased 15% to £64.2 
million, above our medium term target of at least 12% growth per  
year. The majority of the increase was in Equity Solutions through  
the broader distribution in the US and Australia of our global equity 
strategies. Revenue increased ahead of AUM/NUM as a result of mix 
shift between differing margin divisions combined with the impact of 
prior year AUM/NUM growth.

£’000

Net management fees
– Fiduciary Management
– Derivatives
– Equity Solutions Wholesale
– Equity Solutions Institutional

Net management fees
Advisory fees
– Retainers
– Project fees

Advisory fees

Total net management and 
advisory fees

Performance fees
– Fiduciary Management
– Equity Solutions

Total performance fees

Total revenue

2018 

2017

Increase/ 
(decrease)

18,400
11,777
14,521
9,265

53,963

5,443
4,792

10,235

64,198

8,167
2,408

10,575

74,773

17,677
10,883
10,668
6,143

45,371

5,697
4,825

10,522

55,893

6,585
5,964

12,549

68,442

4%
8%
36%
51%

19%

(4)%
(1)%

(3)%

15%

24%
(60)%

(16)%

9%

NET MANAGEMENT FEES
Management fees are generally charged as a percentage of the AUM/NUM 
we manage for clients and are negotiated with clients based on a number 
of factors including the size of mandate. Net management fees reflect 
rebates and other payments to external distributors. 

Overall growth in net management fee revenue was 19%.

Fiduciary Management

Closing fee 
earning AUM 
£m

Growth in 
fee earning 
AUM

Average 
AUM 
£m

10,642

1%

10,677

Average 
margin 
(bps)

17-18

Revenue 
£m

18.4

Growth in 
revenue 
YoY

4%

Fiduciary Management new mandate opportunities have been more 
muted as strong markets and the CMA investigation into fiduciary 
management and investment consulting have led to a limited number  
of pensions tendering for fiduciary management. However, we expect 
growth to return based upon the CMA provisional findings which should 
prove supportive to our fiduciary management proposition.

Derivative Solutions

Closing fee 
earning NUM 
£m

Growth in 
fee earning 
NUM

Average 
NUM 
£m

18,622

10%

17,040

Average 
margin 
(bps)

6-7

Revenue 
£m

11.8

Growth in 
revenue 
YoY

8%

Derivative Solutions comprises Liability Driven Investment (LDI 
including gilt collateral management) and Structured Equity products.

A feature of our diversified business model is that different divisions will 
perform at different points in the market cycle. 

Derivatives by type:

Fiduciary management fees grew by only 4% due to the lower volume  
of new fiduciary mandates coming to market as a result of the CMA 
investigation into investment consultancy. Advisory fees decreased by 
3%, largely due to lower advisory activity given the generally benign 
economic conditions. Overall management fee margins remained 
stable and within the guided range. Performance fees for the year  
were down 16% to £10.6 million due to lower performance fees  
from Equity Solutions. 

£m

Opening fee earning NUM
Sales
Redemptions
Net rebalance

Net flow

Closing fee earning NUM

Mandates in transition 
Redemptions in transition

Structured 
Equity

Gilts and LDI

Total 
NUM

16,888
3,855
(3,094)
973

13,245
1,720
(971)
852

1,601

1,734

14,846

18,622

–
–

12
(18)

3,643
2,135
(2,123)
121

133

3,776

12
(18)

Total mandated NUM

3,770

14,846

18,616

 
 
 
 
28

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

LDI relates to the management of interest rate and inflation risk in the 
underlying pension liabilities. In 2018 we continued to see strong flows 
from existing clients who increased their level of hedging to respond to 
market and scheme funding levels. These hedges generally increase in 
value as interest rates fall, helping to defend clients from increases in 
their liabilities.

Derivative Solutions’ Structured Equity capabilities provide strategies 
to shape the return profile of clients’ equity portfolios. 

We have continued to see strong demand for LDI and Structured Equity 
and have won a number of large mandates including £1.4bn from local 
government pension schemes. Against this, we have seen a larger 
mandate in particular (£1.4bn) reach contractual maturity leading  
to redemptions. 

As Structured Equity products are usually sold at a lower margin  
than LDI, the average margins of the Derivative Solutions division will 
fall over time if structured equity continues to sell strongly, due to 
mix-shift effects.

Equity Solutions – Wholesale and Institutional

Closing fee 
earning AUM 
£m

Growth in 
fee earning 
AUM

4,579

26%

Average 
AUM 
£m

4,407

Average 
margin 
(bps)

53-54

Revenue 
£m

23.8

Growth in 
revenue 
YoY

41%

The Equity Solutions division provides long-only equity funds and 
strategies to institutional clients and wholesale intermediaries. 
Institutional clients can access the strategies through funds or 
segregated mandates. The funds are available to wholesale 
intermediaries who distribute to their retail clients. 

2018 has been a strong year for the Equity Solutions division and its 
PVT investment team with strong sales and investment performance 
increasing AUM above £4.5bn.

In Equity Solutions Wholesale, strong first half AUM growth was 
reversed in H2 following the dismissal of a portfolio manager in 
February 2018. In total, we experienced £532m of redemptions from  
the funds which the portfolio manager previously managed.

Equity Solutions Institutional grew strongly in the year, as demand 
continues for the Global High Alpha strategy in particular – both in the 
UK, US, Australia and New Zealand. We now manage £635m of AUM in 
Australia/New Zealand and by establishing our new office in Australia, 
we expect to expand our business in a market with significant pension 
assets. The acquisition of the Emerging Markets ILC team from Credit 
Suisse resulted in £280m of AUM transitioning to the Group in 
December 2017. 

ADVISORY REVENUES
The Solutions division earns revenues from clients who engage us on a 
retained fee basis or from specific projects. This year has seen a 3% 
decrease in advisory revenues.

The split between retainers and project fees was:

£’000

Retainers
Project fees

Total advisory fees

2018

5,443
4,792

2017

5,697
4,825

10,235

10,522

The same macro-economic factors impacting lower Fiduciary 
Management mandate growth have also impacted the Advisory 
division. In more stable conditions, trustees have less need for support 
in interpreting events and the impact on their schemes. Typically, more 
turbulent markets and one-off events or shocks lead to increases in the 
level of advisory revenues.

Our outlook for Advisory is for largely stable revenues in the UK,  
as we believe that trustees will increasingly move towards a fiduciary 
management model. 

In the US we have made two senior hires and established an office in 
New York. We anticipate that this investment will accelerate the growth 
of our existing US Solutions business.

REVENUE-WEIGHTED ASSET ATTRIBUTION (RWAA)
The revenues of traditional asset management firms have a high 
correlation to movements in markets, particularly equity markets,  
both in terms of AUM flows and investment performance. However,  
the relative diversification of the Group’s revenue streams mean that 
we have more resilience in sources of revenue, particularly in negative 
market conditions.

RWAA classifies our management and advisory revenues by the 
respective driver of the revenue. Management fees from Equity 
Solutions and Fiduciary Management that relate to equity allocations 
are classified as having an equity market driver. Likewise, the 
components of Fiduciary Management that relate to bond and interest 
rate allocations are classified as having an interest rate driver. 

Advisory revenues are not linked to underlying asset prices and 
therefore are classified as not having a market exposure. 

Derivative Solutions is also classified as independent, as while the 
underlying revenue is generated on hedging strategies in interest rates, 
inflation and equities; the revenue is not linked to the mark-to-market 
valuation but to either the contractual notional amount of the derivative 
instrument or the billing notional in the case of certain clients who  
pay a fixed fee. As a result, these revenues do not have a market  
driven exposure. 

GROUP RWAA
JUNE 2018

GROUP RWAA
JUNE 2017

Equities – Non-discretionary  40%
3%
Equities – Discretionary 
12%
Interest rates 
44%
Cash/independent 
1%
Other 

Equities – Non-discretionary  37%
7%
Equities – Discretionary 
Interest rates 
15%
40%
Cash/independent 
1%
Other 

We believe that the Group is well diversified in its revenue base, with 
over 50% of revenue derived from sources which are not as affected by 
equity market conditions. This is not to say that a prolonged downturn 
would not have an impact on our business over time, but our revenues 
are likely to show lower volatility.

The growth in assets in Equity Solutions has increased the revenue 
exposure to equity markets, partly offset by reduced discretionary 
equity exposures in fiduciary management portfolios. The increase in 
Derivatives NUM has led to a larger level of notionally based revenue, 
which does not directly respond to changes in markets.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

29

The table below shows the level of performance that could be earned at 
different outperformance levels over the next two years, based upon 
the following assumptions:

1) The investment performance is consistent in each of the years shown; 

2) The current performance fee eligible AUM is as at 30 June 2018 

without change over the period; and

3) The 30 June 2018 performance level is the starting point.

£m 
Outperformance range each year

-2%
0%
2%

Estimated TIGS performance fees 
recognised

June 2019

June 2020

9
11
13

0
2
6

Performance fees are crystallised on the anniversary date of the client 
engagement. In the figures shown above, approximately 60% of the 
performance fees would be earned in the second half of the year.

Equity Solutions performance fees
In Equity Solutions, performance fees are mainly generated by 
outperformance relative to a stated benchmark. The majority of 
performance fees are realised based on a calendar year performance 
period, with the exception of the RMMIC. RMMIC is structured as a 
closed-ended vehicle. If the net asset value rises above a prescribed 
value; the independent board of directors of RMMIC will consider a 
redemption of shares to return of capital to investors and pay the 
performance fee. 

Performance fees were £2.4m for the year ended 30 June 2018, 
including £1.0m from RMMIC.

At 30 June 2018, total performance fee eligible assets (excluding 
RMMIC) were £435m. Of these assets, £91m were above their high-
water mark by less than 2% and £344m were below their high-water 
mark by less than 2%. The weighted average rate of performance fees 
in respect of outperformance on the eligible AUM is 18%.

PROVISION FOR FCA COMPETITION MATTER
The Group had previously recognised a provision of £1.0m in respect  
of an FCA statement of objections to four asset managers including 
RAMAM, alleging a breach of competition law concerning the disclosure 
and/or acceptance of information about the pricing for shares in relation 
to one IPO and one placing. 

The matter does not affect any clients of the Group or the net asset 
value of any fund or segregated mandate.

RAMAM and the Group have cooperated fully with the matter and  
have pursued a robust defence. Whilst no decision has been reached, 
following feedback from the FCA on the likely quantum of penalty 
should one be imposed, the provision was reduced to £109,000.

PERFORMANCE FEE REVENUE
This year has been another strong year of investment performance  
with all but one of our strategies (US Fiduciary) performing above 
benchmark since inception. Performance fees in Fiduciary Management 
were £8m, resulting from the underlying investment performance 
generated by the investment teams, coupled with the more stable 
interest rate environment. Equity Solutions’ performance fees which 
are now primarily from the River and Mercantile Microcap Investment 
Company (RMMIC), were £2m. These were lower than last year largely 
due to timing of the performance fee crystallisation. In July 2018 a 
further performance fee of £2m was recorded from RMMIC which will 
be included in the income statement next year. 

Fiduciary Management performance fees
Performance fees are earned within the main investment strategy 
within Fiduciary Management, TIGS (Total Investment Governance 
Solutions) and are subject to a deferral mechanism whereby 
performance fees are recorded one third in the year the investment 
performance occurs, and two thirds deferred and spread over two 
further years. If the performance hurdle is exceeded on an annual basis, 
the next third of the deferred fees becomes payable in each of the 
subsequent years. Underperformance in the deferral period is required 
to be made up in subsequent periods before performance fees can be 
earned. In the event that the client redeems its investment, deferred 
fees become immediately payable.

The following table gives an indication of the impact of rates on 
Fiduciary Management performance fees for a given level of 
performance. 

Market condition

Performance
fee impact

Key drivers

Yields fall significantly, 
liabilities rise

Likely low to zero

Even if our 
return-seeking 
performance is 
strong, the 
under-hedge against 
the long term 
interest rate risk will 
be a source of 
underperformance

Yields stable,
liabilities flat

Relatively good, 
assuming 
return-seeking assets 
produce decent 
positive returns

Performance fees 
driven by asset 
returns – as long 
as they are at 
reasonable levels 
we will be paid 
performance fees

Yields rise significantly, 
liabilities fall

Likely to be 
significant

   Because we are 
hedging less than 
100% of liabilities, we 
are likely to strongly 
outperform our 
objectives, especially 
if risk assets are also 
performing

To provide additional guidance on the level of performance fees that 
could be earned in Fiduciary Management we have included the 
following analysis. As noted above, the level of performance fees 
earned are dependent on the performance against benchmark over  
the full deferral period. 

30

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES

REMUNERATION

£’000

2018

2017

£’000

2018

2017

Administrative expenses excluding 
governance
Governance costs
IT project costs
External research costs

Administrative expenses

Total net management and advisory fees

12,800

10,007

Fixed remuneration
Variable remuneration

538
–
736

14,074

64,198

413
1,142
–

11,562

55,893

Total remuneration (excluding EPSP costs)
Total revenue (excluding other income)

Remuneration ratio (total remuneration 
excluding EPSP costs/total revenue)

22,940
16,210

39,150
74,773

52%

20,114
15,201

35,315
68,442

52%

Administrative expenses as a percentage of 
net management and advisory fees

21.9%

20.7%

We had previously stated that we expected the ratio this year to be 
20-21%, plus £0.8m in respect of research costs under MiFID II. We have 
ended the year within this range, at 20.8% excluding external research 
costs (21.9% overall).

Aside from the impact of research costs, the year-on-year increase 
resulted from the following main areas of spend: occupancy due to 
increased headcount; IT costs associated with the Group’s new IT 
infrastructure following separation from the previous provider; legal costs 
relating to investment in the funds platform including: the Global Macro 
Fund; regulatory compliance; and the new ILC team based in Chicago.

The Global Macro Fund was launched in February 2018 and costs in 
relation to its launch were £0.3m. The one-off costs in relation to 
transitioning from the Credit Suisse Luxembourg UCITS platform  
to a new platform provider were £0.2m.

The additional legal costs related to a number of regulatory and 
compliance initiatives as a result of changes in the competition 
regulations, work on the implementation of MiFID II and legal fees  
in relation to the new presence in New York and Australia. 

We continue to expect upward pressure on administrative expenses  
in the coming year, most notably the full-year effect of external 
research costs (an increase against the current year of circa £0.8m),  
and continued product development and investment in infrastructure 
including the New York and Australian offices. As a result, we expect the 
ratio of administrative expenses to net management and advisory fees 
to be at a similar level (21-22%) to the current year.

Remuneration expense includes: fixed remuneration comprising  
base salaries, drawings, benefits and associated taxes; and variable 
remuneration comprising performance bonus, profit share paid to  
the partners of RAMAM LLP, the amortisation of the fair value of 
performance share awards under non-dilutive share plans and 
associated taxes.

Fixed remuneration is allocated to net management and advisory fees. 
Variable remuneration is accrued on net management and advisory 
fees, and performance fees. 

The increase in the underlying ratio year on year reflects the investment 
made in people in relation to new initiatives – these include the New 
York and Australia offices, and the ILC team. This cost has been incurred 
ahead of the expected revenue.

Executive Performance Share Plan (EPSP)
The EPSP was established prior to IPO, and Executive Directors were 
given awards for a maximum of 7.3m shares, which they would be 
entitled to receive based upon achieving a compound total shareholder 
return (TSR) of between 12% and 30% during the period from IPO  
to June 2018, with a one-year holding period after that date, until  
June 2019.

As at 30 June 2018, the measurement period for the EPSP had ended. 
The compound annual TSR was based upon the three month volume 
weighted average price at the end date of the period, which was 19%. 
This results in 57% of the A shares being eligible for award and none of 
the B shares. This equates to a total of 2.8m shares, or 3% of current 
issued share capital.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

31

STATUTORY AND ADJUSTED PROFITS

£’000

2018

2017

Statutory profit before tax
Statutory pre-tax margin

Adjusted profit before tax
Adjusted pre-tax margin

Adjusted underlying  
profit before tax
Adjusted underlying  
pre-tax margin

18,452
25%

21,824 
29%

16,389
24%

23,427
34%

2016

7,236
15%

11,849
25%

16,079

16,360

11,084

25%

29%

24%

Adjusted profit after tax

17,567

18,589

9,536

The Directors believe that adjusted profit is a measure of the cash 
operating profits of the business and gives an indication of the profits 
available for distribution to shareholders. Statutory profit has increased 
ahead of adjusted profit as a result of a number of gains which are not 
included in adjusted profit, most notably the bargain purchase gain on 
the acquisition of the ILC team. The definition of adjusted underlying 
and adjusted profit, alongside a reconciliation to statutory profit can be 
found in note 14 to the consolidated financial statements.

Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin represents adjusted underlying 
profit before tax, divided by net management and advisory fees.

Investment during the year
During the year, the Group has invested in new capabilities and 
geographic presence: the ILC team; the New York and Australian 
presence, and the Global Macro Fund. Excluding these items (both cost 
and revenue), the adjusted underlying margin would be 28%.

ILC ACQUISITION
Following the signing of a heads of terms and investment advisory 
agreement with Credit Suisse Asset Management (CSAM) in June 2017, 
an emerging market equity investment team (the ILC team) who 
managed $0.4bn of assets, transferred to the Group. These strategies 
were managed under an investment advisory agreement with CSAM 
until the investment management agreements were transferred to the 
Group, which occurred in December 2017. The addition of the ILC team, 
who have a similar life cycle investment philosophy to the PVT team, 
expands our equity expertise into emerging market equities. The assets 
on transition (£280m) are shown in AUM as a result of the funds having 
transferred to the Group under an IMA.

Prior to the IMA transfer, the income from the ILC team was recorded as 
advisory fees.

On transfer of the IMAs to the Group, an acquisition was triggered.  
The terms of the deal have led to a ‘bargain purchase’, resulting in a gain 
of £1m being recorded in the income statement. This represents an 
accounting entry as opposed to a realised gain, and so it is excluded 
from adjusted profit.

CAPITAL, LIQUIDITY AND REGULATORY CAPITAL
The business is strongly cash generative, generating net cash from 
operations of £18m. Cash and cash equivalents at year end were £24m. 

As a business regulated by the FCA, we hold prudent levels of capital 
resource in order to ensure our financial stability. The Internal Capital 
Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) is a ‘living’ process and is 
treated as a continuous exercise to ensure that we are holding sufficient 
levels of equity capital for the scale and nature of our operations and 
risk. During the year we have revised our risk and capital framework, 
and increased our regulatory capital requirements to reflect the 
expansion and underlying growth in our business. 

As at 30 June 2018, adjusting for the effect of the interim and proposed 
final dividends, the Group holds a regulatory capital surplus of around 
30% in excess of our assessed requirement.

EMPLOYEE BENEFIT TRUST (EBT)
The Group’s EBT purchases Group shares in the open market to meet 
the potential vesting of share awards granted under the Group’s PSP 
and DEP share plans.

During the year, the Group’s EBT purchased 0.5m shares relating to the 
previous years’ share awards and transferred 0.6m as a result of award 
vestings. The net cost of these transactions was £1.7m and is shown in 
the statement of changes in equity. As at 30 June 2018, the EBT held 
1.8m shares. The weighted average number of shares in issue has 
reduced as a result of purchases of own shares by the EBT. The EBT  
has waived the right to dividends on the shares which it holds.

As at 30 June 2018, the Group had granted share awards which were 
either expected to vest, or could possibly vest, over 2.3m shares. During 
the Group’s end of year remuneration process, the Group granted share 
awards over a further 1.6m shares, based upon an estimated grant price. 

DIVIDENDS
On 6 April 2018, an interim dividend of 7.6 pence per share was  
paid, which included a special dividend of 2.2 pence relating to net 
performance fees. The Directors have declared a second interim 
dividend of 5.5 pence per share, of which 1.3 pence is a special dividend 
relating to net performance fees to be paid on 2 November 2018. 

In addition, the Directors are proposing to shareholders a final dividend 
of 5.5 pence per share, of which 2.3 pence per share is a special dividend 
relating to net performance fees. Total dividends per share paid, 
declared or proposed for the year ended 30 June 2018 are 18.6 pence 
per share, representing 80% of the adjusted underlying profit after tax 
and 100% of the net performance fee profit after tax. 

Kevin Hayes
Chief Financial Officer

32

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

RISK MANAGEMENT

Sean Breslin
Head of Legal and Compliance

CONDUCT
Of course those will not be the only changes, 
since a year from now we will be putting 
the final preparations in place for the 
implementation of the Senior Managers 
and Certification Regime (SM&CR) which 
will apply to the Group from December 
2019. Relating that to the changing macro 
environment, the timing is of course 
portentous, in that the crisis of 2007/8 was 
among so many other things a crisis of 
conduct. This new regulation seeks to address 
the issues of responsibility and accountability 
which go to the heart of good conduct. 

We might hope for the best but should 
prepare for the worst; downturn or crisis 
who knows, but I would be surprised if the 
markets progress unperturbed. Choppy 
markets shake things up and when we are 
knocked off-balance that is when things can 
go awry. Solid risk management procedures, 
systems and controls are of course critical 
to safe navigation, but so is good conduct 
and clarity on the expectations around it. 

As noted in the Chairman’s statement, the 
Group has been strengthened at the Board 
level with the addition of John Misselbrook, 
who has experience of the SM&CR in 
practice. The Group has been dealing with 
an FCA investigation relating to competition 
matters, and we have also been engaged 
with regulators as part of the CMA’s 
investigation into investment consultancy 
and fiduciary management. While neither of 
these has a specific conduct focus, conduct 
issues are nevertheless at the heart of the 
relevant issues, whether they relate to the 
effective operation of the markets, or to 
considerations of conflicts of interest and 
having a clear focus on client outcomes. 

The Group has always considered itself to 
be a business focused on client outcomes, 
with conduct a core value in its thinking. 
In the past financial year there has been a 
renewed focus across the Group on the critical 
importance of good conduct to the success 
both of the Group’s business and also to the 
achievement of clients’ desired outcomes. The 
Chairman has emphasised this and addressed 
the issues head on in his statement and 
Angela Crawford-Ingle has described in her 
report on the activities of the Audit and Risk 
Committees some of the changes that have 
been or are being made to the underlying risk 
management infrastructure, including the 
separation of the Audit and Risk Committee 
into two standalone committees. Conduct as 
a broader theme has received a great deal of 
attention and active support from the Board 
and the Group’s executive management, 
led from the front by our Chairman and 
by the Group’s CEO Mike Faulkner. 

I am struck in writing the 
report for the end of the 
2018 financial year that 
the opening paragraph 
of my report last year 
could be carried over 
almost as is. 

I had not expected that would be the case. The 
UK government has limped on, even weaker 
than it was a year ago but sustained by an 
opposition consumed with its own issues and, 
with depressing predictability, we are still no 
nearer to having a clear view of the post-Brexit 
road ahead. The markets have continued to 
show resilience (so far) through Korean nuclear 
summits and disruptive trade disputes. 

However, there is an inescapable sense that 
we are a bit closer to the cliff edge in a number 
of areas, so I expect we will see greater 
turbulence in the not too distant future. There 
is a deep pool of potential catalysts to choose 
from but, suffice to say, I don’t think I will 
be in a minority in stating categorically that 
the environment for the asset management 
business and our clients will look different a 
year from now. If the only meaningful changes 
are to the structure of the markets, the names 
of the rules we operate under and where 
we operate from to comply with them then 
we will consider ourselves fortunate. I don’t 
expect that to be the case, which is why we 
have been preparing clients for a downturn.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

33

The Group has historically treated conduct 
as an overlay lens for all of the Group’s 
activities and we will continue in the coming 
year to develop clearer metrics and means of 
managing conduct risk and its impact across 
the Group. The Group has added Ian Iceton as 
Managing Director of Talent, Performance and 
Reward; Ian brings a wealth of experience to 
the role and the application of his experience, 
coupled with infrastructural changes and 
clear direction from the Board, should put 
the Group in a good position for SM&CR.

BREXIT
The Group does not have a significant business 
presence in EU markets, but it does have a 
number of clients who would be impacted 
by a ‘hard’ or ‘clean’ Brexit that left the UK 
without a deal of any kind or a transition 
period. Despite the denial of logical self-
interest on the part of both the UK and the 
EU, we do have to contemplate that this is 
now a plausible outcome. The Group’s Brexit 
working group is finalising what its response 
to such a scenario should be, with the logical 
outcome if necessary, being the establishment 
of a permanent presence in the EU, probably 
in Ireland, to align with the Group’s Irish 
ICAV platform and with the small number 
of affected clients serviced from there. The 
Group is engaged with Irish counsel and 
is making relevant arrangements which it 
seems increasingly likely will be necessary to 
avoid the cliff-edge risk of a no deal Brexit.

THREE LINES OF DEFENCE
Changes to the risk infrastructure are 
described in the Audit and Risk Committee 
report. However, as we head into an 
anticipated downturn and related to the 
conduct considerations referenced above, 
the operation of the three lines of defence 
model is increasingly important to the Group. 
The effective operation and embedding 
of the model is critical to delivering better 
risk-based decision making and good 
conduct across the business. The decision to 
strengthen internal audit as a formal third 
line of defence with the planned recruitment 
of a new head of function is a recognition of 
the importance of this issue to the Group and 
the importance placed on assurance for the 
Board. We have also continued to strengthen 
the second line of defence with the hiring of 
a Chief Risk Officer and we are in the course 
of hiring a Chief Information Security Officer. 
At the same time, work has been done and 
continues to refresh responsibilities and 
expectations across the first and second 
lines of defence including clarification of 
risk responsibilities and ownership.

CYBER RISKS AND INFORMATION 
SECURITY 
Cyber related risk is neither new nor 
‘emerging’, it has been a reality of business 
life for many years now and effective risk 
management systems are an essential 
requirement. The Group has bolstered 
its oversight in this area over the past 
period and will continue to do so going 
forward. The appointment of a CISO is 
intended to support those efforts.

The regulators are increasingly adopting 
‘regtech’ or ‘suptech’ into their oversight of 
firms and markets. While that represents 
neither a threat nor a risk to firms per se, it 
does present a challenge in that the regulator 
is in effect requiring firms to get better at 
surveillance, information gathering, execution 
and governance if only to be able to keep 
up with regulatory expectations. The FCA’s 
recent move to Stratford is advertised 
as facilitating the regulator’s tech-based 
oversight capabilities, so we can only expect 
this theme to develop apace. This imposes 
an obligation on the Group to assess its 
technology and systems. There is no shortage 
of ‘solutions’ to every conceivable risk or 
compliance issue; unfortunately, many of 
them simply don’t work. Nevertheless, the 
challenge for the Group remains to determine 
the extent and means by which it will embrace 
changes in technology to improve its risk 
and compliance systems. The Group has not 
pre-judged the issue but there is a risk that 
market standards can quickly raise around 
those that do not keep up; the Group will 
continue to assess its needs and the viability 
of real value-added solutions accordingly.

EVOLVING REGULATORY ISSUES
The CMA’s investigation into investment 
consulting and fiduciary management and 
the ongoing output from the FCA’s Asset 
Market Study continue to occupy the Group. 
There is much to support in the output of 
both pieces of work which do give rise to 
practical issues that impact the business 
and have to be addressed. We would not 
characterise anything to date as a risk to the 
business of the Group, but they add to the 
operational workload. Some of the changes 
relate to issues which have either already 
been delivered e.g. because of MiFID II, or are 
work in progress, but we do not have the final 
position from the CMA, and the FCA has yet 
to determine its final view in certain areas, 
so a combination of vigilance and practical 
action remains the requirement. For example, 
we reasonably expect work to be required 
in respect of value for money assessments, 
governance and independence, benchmarks 
and fund objectives and performance, 
costs and disclosures among others.

The report of the Audit and Risk Committees 
accurately reflects the ongoing work needed 
to confirm that the changes introduced 
by both MiFID II and GDPR have been 
embedded and we do not take success for 
granted; relevant issues remain in focus. 
One of the MiFID II related issues which 
has not attracted a lot of attention post 
implementation has been the introduction 
of the PROD rules in the FCA Handbook. 
Arguably there is much there that should 
have already been operating, but the dynamic 
between distributor and manufacturer has 
changed and there is further work to be done 
to ensure that arrangements are operating 
effectively. The Group updated its relevant 
policies as part of its MiFID II preparation, but 
work is under way to review and revise them 
further. SM&CR brings accountabilities into 
sharp focus, so introducing now the rigours 
that will be required in just over a year’s 
time is something we regard as important.

We know that the UK government intends, via 
the European Withdrawal Act, to incorporate 
existing EU legislation into UK law as at the 
time of Brexit. What we do not have a good 
sense of is what the FCA and/or the EU Home 
State regulators might do in terms of gold-
plating or demand in terms of equivalency. 
The FCA’s Temporary Permission Regime 
provides welcome assurance for inbound 
business and it appears that we can have 
confidence that, as advertised, the FCA will 
deliver that which is within its gift in terms 
of inbound business, but there remains 
uncertainty on the future direction of travel. 
There are big unanswered questions such as 
who will replace the UK at the EU’s regulatory 
top table; the answer is likely to shape the 
UK’s desire and ability to move in tandem 
and retain equivalence (if there is any). There 
is also the background issue of the revisiting 
and refreshing of existing EU legislation (e.g. 
MiFID and EMIR) and the development of 
new initiatives e.g. the EU’s action plan on 
sustainable investing all without a voice from 
the UK – so there is much to keep in mind. 

Prudential developments cannot pass without 
mention. Exactly what will happen with the 
upcoming proposed changes to prudential 
requirements in the absence of a transition 
period remains uncertain, though on an 
equivalency basis it would be reasonable to 
expect the FCA to follow ESMA and implement 
the new requirements (probably in 2020). 
The issue remains very much on our radar.

Sean Breslin
Head of Legal and Compliance

34

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES
The following table summarises the principal 
risks and uncertainties considered most 
relevant to our business. See note 28 to 
the consolidated financial statements for 
further information on financial risks.

The Group’s outcome orientated approach, 
which focuses on tailoring solutions using 
the Group’s various skillsets in order to 
achieve client outcomes, has conduct at its 
core. Therefore, in assessing the Group’s 
risks, the Directors have considered the 
FCA’s 11 principles for businesses.

Gold cells are those which the Group 
considers to be the most significant in 

threatening the Group’s business model, 
future performance, solvency or liquidity. 

Changes in risk level – the Board recorded 
an increase last year in relation to risks 
associated with regulation. Following the 
implementation of MiFID II and GDPR in the 
first half of 2018, there might reasonably 
be a reduction in risk for the year 2018-19, 
but the reality is that successful embedding 
remains an ongoing risk, so the level of risk 
exposure to risks associated to regulation 
remains unchanged. As has been described 
elsewhere in the report, the Group does 
not have significant client exposure to risks 
associated with the UK’s withdrawal from the 

FCA principle

Definition

Risk and outcome

Mitigations

EU. Nevertheless, the broad risks and those to 
the markets associated with a no-deal Brexit 
are considered to be higher than they were a 
year ago. The Group relies on outsourced IT 
infrastructure to support its business; in the 
context of an increase in risks related to cyber-
attacks, it is reasonable that those risks have 
increased further as criminals and hackers 
become more sophisticated. The Group has 
increased its investment in governance and 
testing of IT systems and information security 
as a result; and is in the process of recruiting 
a Chief Information Security Officer.

Integrity

A firm must conduct its business 
with integrity.

With the diverse offering that  
the Group provides, conflicts  
of interest could arise if not 
properly managed, undermining 
the Group’s ability to deliver the 
best outcomes for clients.

The client engagement process necessitates identifying actual or potential 
conflicts of interest between the Group and the client. Conflicts should be 
avoided or managed and mitigated in a manner which prevents the risk of 
damage to client interests. Conflicts which can be effectively managed can be 
understood and discussed with the client and mitigating measures introduced 
where appropriate. The Group pays due regard to the interest of its clients and 
puts treating them fairly central and foremost.

The Group maintains and operates polices and organisational and 
administrative arrangements to identify, monitor, manage, prevent and 
resolve any material conflicts of interest giving rise to a risk of damage to  
its clients.

Reputational damage could lead 
to a loss of clients, reduction in 
AUM and/or NUM and a 
reduction in the profitability  
of the Group.

Our ethos is to deliver against the desired outcomes of our clients and other 
stakeholders. This fosters a culture of integrity and conduct that is based  
on engagement with our clients, shareholders, regulators, employees and  
the broader community. Our reputation is based on the quality of this 
engagement process.

Conflicts of interest

A firm must manage conflicts of 
interest fairly, both between 
itself and its customers and 
between a customer and  
another client.

As an investment manager and 
advisor, the Group is at risk of 
perceived or actual conflicts of 
interest. These could lead to 
direct financial loss, a loss of 
clients, failure to win new 
business and reputational issues.

Each client determines the nature of their engagement with us, including  
the range of products and services which are appropriate. Across our business 
we see different levels, from those who wish not to see our investment 
management offerings in any form, to those who expect to be involved in 
product development from early stages. By ensuring that clients drive the 
engagement, their interests are promoted and the risk of damage to them and 
potential conflicts are limited.

Skill, care and 
diligence

A firm must conduct its business 
with due skill, care and diligence.

The loss of, or inability to train or 
recruit key personnel could have 
a material adverse effect on the 
Group’s business.

Policies, procedures and ongoing training is provided covering product and 
services, Know Your Customer, anti-money laundering, Treating Customers 
Fairly and other areas of compliance.

We have formal processes of training and accreditation to advance and 
motivate our employees in order to support the continuity of our client 
engagement business model.

Our remuneration structures are designed to motivate and support the 
development of our employees and provide incentives linked to their individual, 
divisional and Group performance.

Succession plans identify employees with the potential to fill key business 
leadership positions.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

35

FCA principle

Definition

Risk and outcome

Mitigations

Management and 
control 

Market conduct

A firm must take reasonable care 
to organise and control its affairs 
responsibly and effectively, with 
adequate risk management 
systems.

A firm must observe proper 
standards of market conduct.

The risk of loss resulting from 
inadequate or failed processes, 
people, systems and controls 
(including from outsource 
providers) or from external 
events leading to financial loss, 
forgone revenue, fines and 
reputation damage.

The risk of critical systems or 
connectivity failures leading  
to an inability of the Group to 
operate for a period of time.  
This could lead to trading losses, 
as well as client losses and 
reputational damage.

The risk of loss resulting 
specifically from cyber attack, 
either to gain control of Group 
systems, or have Group 
employees make erroneous 
transactions.

Effective Group oversight and governance through Board of Directors and 
Board Committees.

Experienced and knowledgeable employees with appropriate segregation  
of roles and responsibilities.

Documentation, policies and procedures govern workflows, internal control 
procedures and escalation protocols to achieve predictable outcomes.

Workflows, internal control processes and escalation protocols designed  
to achieve predictable outcomes.

Insurance covering errors and omission mitigating significant financial loss.

Business continuity management programme for the continuity of critical 
business functions and services. 

Where the Group outsources operational activities, it chooses parties of an 
appropriate nature and scale to provide robust controls, and maintains 
appropriate management and oversight.

The Group’s Compliance and Risk functions operate alongside the business and 
provide guidance and oversight of process and control procedures designed to 
ensure compliance with governance and regulatory requirements. Measures 
include a clear, consistent view on risk and risk appetite, proactive and effective 
monitoring to minimise unexpected incidents, and a comprehensive 
compliance monitoring programme.

The Group seeks to develop IT infrastructure diversity, for example in having 
redundant connections to key data centres.

The Group maintains business resilience measures and disaster recovery 
capabilities which include remote working facilities, back-up IT environments 
and disaster-recovery testing.

The Group maintains physical preventions (IT hardware and software) to 
minimise the risk of successful cyber attack. Systems are subject to periodic 
penetration testing and staff are trained and regularly reminded to remain 
vigilant to the risk of attack and how to respond.

Financial prudence

A firm must maintain adequate 
financial resources.

Significant withdrawals of AUM 
and/or NUM at short notice and 
loss of advisory mandates could 
have an impact on management 
fees and advisory fees.

The client engagement process gives the Group an opportunity to maintain  
a relationship across market cycles both in advisory and investment 
management. The engagement process allows us to understand the risk 
appetite of the client and operate proactively to respond to a client’s changing 
requirements and exposure.

Relations with 
regulators

A firm must deal with its 
regulators in an open and 
cooperative way, and must 
appropriately disclose to the 
regulator anything relating to the 
firm of which that regulator 
would reasonably expect notice.

Sustained underperformance 
across a range of the Group’s 
products and strategies, or poor 
general performance in markets 
could result in reduced 
management fee and 
performance fee income.

A breach of regulatory 
requirements could result in fines 
and sanctions which could 
diminish the Group’s reputation 
with clients and the market 
generally.

Regulatory changes as a 
consequence of Brexit may lead 
to increased levels of regulatory 
capital or costs of compliance.

Our focus on client outcomes aligns us with our clients and results in a business 
with low attrition rates. This creates a sustainable business which is therefore 
less subject to cyclical effects. This allows us to grow, attract and retain our 
client and investment talent.

A sustained reduction in AUM as a result of adverse market movements could 
result in a corresponding reduction in management and performance fee 
revenue. This may be partly offset by an increase in our advisory revenues as 
clients re-evaluate their investment and hedging strategies. In the short to 
medium term we can adjust our cost base, particularly remuneration which is 
variable with our overall economics.

As a regulated entity, the Group and some of its subsidiaries are required  
to hold appropriate levels of capital and liquidity in order to ensure their 
sustainability. Systems and controls and the process for assessing the 
adequacy of financial resources and associated risks (ICAAP) are documented 
in the Group’s ICAAP review document, which examines downside events 
including revenue declines and the costs of an orderly cessation of the Group; 
and if appropriate the Group holds additional capital as a result of these tests.

Regulatory changes are monitored by the Group’s Compliance and Legal 
functions and an active dialogue is maintained both with our clients and with 
regulatory bodies so that we can understand and adapt business model and 
strategy accordingly.

Finance and Compliance functions operate processes and controls to ensure 
the timely and accurate submission of information to the FCA.

 
 
 
36

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED

FCA principle

Definition

Risk and outcome

Mitigations

Customers’ interests

Communications 
with clients

A firm must pay due regard to the 
interests of its customers and 
treat them fairly.

A firm must pay due regard to the 
information needs of its clients, 
and communicate information to 
them in a way which is clear, fair 
and not misleading.

The chosen investment strategy 
does not meet the client’s 
desired outcomes. This could 
lead to a loss of clients, failure  
to win new business and 
reputational issues.

There are a number of risks arising from when we first engage with clients to understand their desired 
outcomes, and ultimately execute on a strategy in order to achieve those outcomes:

The client engagement process is based on engagement with regulatory 
approved investment professionals and advisors who develop with the client 
their desired client outcomes.

Suitability is assessed by experienced and approved personnel who work 
closely with clients to understand their needs and desired outcomes to develop 
tailored solutions.

We have a long track record of investment performance which allows us to 
model for the client’s historical and hypothetical performance scenarios under 
different market conditions which informs our clients of the range of possible 
outcomes that they could expect relative to their objectives.

A regular governance process with clients provides for regular interaction to 
identify changes in the client’s desired outcomes and solicits feedback on the 
actual outcomes experienced by the client.

The Group’s Investment Committee oversees the Group’s investment views 
and there is a committee structure in place to support the provision of 
consistent investment views across the Group.

Investment opinions are subject to considerable evaluation and discussion prior 
to implementation or presentation to clients as appropriate to their form of 
engagement with the Group.

Investment strategies are designed and back-tested, and stressed against 
different historical market events to identify to the client a range of possible 
outcomes. Investment performance is understood to vary within a range of 
outcomes and this helps clients understand the characteristics of different 
strategy options.

The governance process with the client provides a regular interaction to report 
to the client their investment performance against the specified client 
outcomes. This allows the business to check the appropriateness of the 
strategy design with clients. 

The Group fosters a culture that supports a business model, behaviours and 
practices that have the fair treatment of clients at its core. This requires an 
open and honest dialogue regarding investment performance relative to the 
stated outcomes.

The investment management process is documented within the investment 
mandates, including risk limits and concentration limits. Investment guidelines 
and restriction metrics are monitored against mandate parameters to maintain 
compliance. Variance triggers and thresholds are in place, and breaches are 
promptly escalated.

Underlying liquidity within funds is monitored, and adjusted as market 
conditions dictate.

Compliance and Risk, which operate alongside the business but have 
independent reporting lines, act as a second line of defence in respect of the 
investment management process.

A culture of client engagement, based on conduct and fairness, fosters an  
open and honest dialogue regarding investment performance relative to the 
stated outcomes.

The Group does not provide custody services.

Through the client-led engagement process, clients either select their own 
custodian or, in agreement with the business, reputable providers are chosen 
to ensure appropriate protection of client assets.

Customers: 
relationships  
of trust

A firm must take reasonable care 
to ensure the suitability of its 
advice and discretionary 
decisions for any customer who is 
entitled to rely upon its 
judgment.

The investment performance is 
not in line with client 
expectations or investment 
advice is poor. This could lead to 
a loss of clients, failure to win 
new business and reputational 
issues.

Failure to execute the investment 
strategy in accordance with the 
stated investment mandate, for 
reasons including errors and 
misconduct. This includes 
managing the liquidity of 
underlying investments to match 
IMA redemption requirements. 
This could lead to direct financial 
loss, a loss of clients, failure to 
win new business and 
reputational issues.

Clients’  
assets

A firm must arrange adequate 
protection for clients’ assets 
when it is responsible for them.

Failure of third-party custody 
arrangements lead to client 
losses.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

37

VIABILITY STATEMENT

The Directors have assessed the viability of the Group over  
the next three years and confirm that they have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will continue in operation and  
meet its liabilities as they fall due.

The Directors reviewed the viability 
assessment period of three years and have 
confirmed that it remains appropriate as it 
most closely corresponds to the planning 
horizons used within the Group.

The viability process was run closely with 
the financial modelling for the ICAAP (the 
Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment 
Process), involving business heads, 
divisional COOs, and senior representatives 
from Finance, Risk, and Compliance.

This team considered the principal risks 
that could threaten the Group’s business 
model, profitability, solvency and regulatory 
capital adequacy. As the business is strongly 
cash generative, the risks which would 
threaten viability were those which would 
reduce revenues or lead to cost increases, 
thereby eroding regulatory capital and 
solvency over time. These could be the 
result of market events and macroeconomic 
shocks leading to possible investment 
losses and outflows, operational issues 
or regulatory changes leading to cost 
increases, or reputational damage.

Three scenarios were chosen to simulate 
severe yet plausible outcomes:

1. A prolonged downturn, with stagnant 
recovery over the viability assessment 
period. This is consistent with stress 
scenarios the Group uses for certain 
client portfolio models and provides a 
significant macro-economic stress, as it 
tests the resilience of the business over a 
longer period than a short shock (due to 
the lack of recovery);

2. The loss of key investment personnel 

within the Group, leading to outflows of 
assets; and

3. The occurrence of both events at the 

same time.

In the prior year, the Group did not consider 
the simultaneous occurrence of two 
stresses, but also considered the Prudential 
Regulatory Authority’s ‘Base Case’ macro-
economic stress. This is less severe than 
the first scenario used, and therefore its 
inclusion was deemed to not add value, 
with the addition of an occurrence of both 
internal and external stresses (scenario 3) 
being a more useful approach to take.

The scenarios were evaluated using the 
Group’s 2018/19 budget and three year 
financial projections as a starting point, 
with the impact of changes on revenues and 
costs as a result of each scenario added to  
the model.

The impact of market moves on asset values 
and investment performance was modelled 
by investment teams within the business, 
and the second-order impacts on flows were 
assessed by the divisional COOs and Group 
Finance with input from business heads and 
distribution team members. The impact 
of cost increases was assessed based upon 
known costings at current operational levels 
and the levels of additional resource required. 
Where management actions were assumed 
to occur in order to reduce costs or otherwise 
protect regulatory capital, cash or profits they 
were subject to rigorous challenge to ensure 
they were feasible, both in scope and timing.

The Group’s balance sheet, cash and 
regulatory capital positions in each scenario 
were modelled by Finance by applying known 
historical behaviours (such as invoicing timing 
and frequency, average debtor payment days) 
adjusted for any expected impact on these 
assumptions arising from the stress scenarios.

The lowest profit, regulatory capital and cash 
position arose in scenario three, however in 
each scenario the Group remained profitable 
on an adjusted basis, albeit at reduced levels. 
As a result, this meant that the regulatory 
capital and cash balances were not eroded 
and the business remained viable. 

The resilience of the business to these 
different scenarios resulted from:

–  The relative diversification of revenue 

sources between different asset classes, 
notional amounts and advisory revenues 
– this is illustrated further in the Group’s 
RWAA on page 28;

–  The generally institutional nature of many 

of the Group’s clients, leading to less 
short-term negative impact on flows 
following market events. This is reflected in 
the Group’s regretted institutional attrition, 
which is measured on page 27;

–  The remuneration policy of the Group and 
the underlying divisions generally being 
expressed as a percentage of revenue, 
meaning revenue reductions are partially 
cushioned by falling variable remuneration 
levels (up to a point); and

–  The current strong starting profit levels, 

combined with a dividend policy which pays 
dividends based upon actual profits 
including performance fees, as opposed to a 
progressive dividend. Whilst strong dividend 
returns to shareholders are important to the 
Directors, this approach gives the Group 
more flexibility to respond to the most 
severe stresses. 

The nature of the viability testing is that the 
scenarios chosen should be severe. Where 
appropriate, the Group has controls and 
processes in place to reduce the chances of 
negative events occurring, and mitigate their 
impact if they do. Several other scenarios were 
considered, but dismissed as less severe as a 
result of controls in place. This included the 
failure of a critical outsource, particularly IT 
due to the heavy reliance placed on systems 
and software in the business. This scenario was 
not chosen for several reasons, including the 
results of successful disaster recovery testing 
with minimal latency, physical mitigations 
such as diverse communication lines and 
data centres and real-time disaster recovery 
copies allowing for fast redeployment.

38

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

PEOPLE

Ian Iceton
Managing Director – Talent, Performance  
and Reward

Authenticity: One of the important things 
that differentiates us is our authenticity. 
Many of our new employees have commented 
on how genuine they find our people. We 
encourage a sense that people are straight 
and clear about what they believe. 

Respect: We expect people to be candid 
with others, however this must be done 
with respect. Our people think about 
how they frame their views in a way that 
is respectful to other team members.

Community: Internally, our people are helpful 
in supporting the good of the organisation and 
externally, we encourage people to do things 
that have genuine benefit for others; we aim 
to make a difference through the things we do, 
including charitable work and contributions.

Diversity: We value a work force that is diverse. 
Our recruitment and talent management is 
based on merit and performance. 

We protect the rights of our employees 
through our employment policies and 
practices, which prohibit discrimination 
and encourage inclusion. We have a 
Diversity and Equal Opportunities policy 
which requires that all employees and job 
applicants are treated fairly and equally.

We are supportive of the focus on diversity 
in the 2018 Code (defined in the Corporate 
Governance section hereafter). We believe 
that we have a strong and diverse talent 
pool which we are focused on developing 
into the senior managers of the future. 
Accordingly, we have decided to early adopt 
disclosure of the gender balance of senior 
management and their direct reports, as 
required by the 2018 Code which follows 
the recommendation of the Hampton-
Alexander FTSE Women Leaders Project. 

However, we recognise that diversity 
at senior management and Board 
level could be improved, and gender 
diversity is reported to the Remuneration 
Committee at each meeting. 

Reward and recognition
The business operates a competitive reward 
and recognition system, which incorporates a 
very popular opportunity for all employees to 
invest in the business via a save-as-you-earn 
scheme (currently we have 120 employees 
who are part of this programme – over half 
of those eligible). In addition, a further 70 
employees were awarded equity participation 
in the business as part of the end of year 
compensation round as recognition of their 
commitment and contribution to the business; 
philosophically it is important to us that as 
many employees as possible, through these 
two mechanisms, share in the rewards of 
equity ownership of the business, aligning 
their interests with outside shareholders.

PEOPLE DEVELOPMENT
The business continues to increase its focus 
and investment on developing our people.  
This has included creating the new post of 
Head of Talent, Performance and Reward, 
which I now occupy. Further investments in  
key HR positions will follow, to provide 
more direct support to our line managers. 
Our people, and their development and 
advancement, are  critical to the success 
of our client-led business. Our business 
model is based on client engagement. 
The skills required by our people are a 
balance of interpersonal and analytical 
– to listen, understand and act. 

As a business we are subject to competitive 
pressures and this includes the competition 
for talent. In order to remain competitive, 
we have a talent management philosophy 
that is linked to attracting, advancing 
and retaining talented people. 

We measure regretted staff turnover as 
a metric for our success in retaining and 
rewarding our talent. Regretted staff turnover 
is measured as the number of staff leaving 
the firm voluntarily during the year who were 
graded as performing as expected or better 
in their previous performance review, as a 
proportion of the average heads during the 
year. For 2017/18 this number was 9%.

Our talent management philosophy is  
based on:

Principles:
Our principles are the things that define  
what and who we are. 

Integrity: We understand that any sense 
of us operating without integrity will 
destroy our business; clients don’t want 
to engage with people they can’t trust.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

39

VALUES

Values describe the behaviours 
that the business considers 
to be critical to success. 
Behaviours not consistent with 
the values are not acceptable, 
and are dealt with quickly.

PASSIONATE ABOUT CLIENT SUCCESS
We expect our people to be passionate 
about client success. We care about 
our clients. We gauge this by whether 
clients believe our commitment.

CREATIVE – INVOLVING, CHALLENGING 
AND CONVINCING OTHERS
Creativity is critical to our client 
proposition. We  aim  to keep reinventing 
ourselves to achieve our  business 
objectives of growth and to avoid becoming 
commoditised. This is best achieved 
by bringing together diverse people to 
debate issues. We therefore seek to hire 
and advance people who are creative, 
who involve others to get higher quality 
input and are comfortable challenging. 
In debate, we do not recognise hierarchy, 
only the quality of the argument.

OPEN, CANDID AND CONSTRUCTIVE
We expect our people to be open with 
information and their views. We expect 
people to be candid, particularly in 
the management of others and want 
all interaction to be constructive.

DEMANDING OF OUR BEST
We aim to stretch ourselves and each other, 
to  be the best we can. We are demanding 
of our people and we are committed 
to helping them achieve excellence. 

We expect people to express constructively 
their disappointment for anything 
that is mediocre, be it client work, 
performance or internal processes.

COMMERCIAL IN ALL THAT WE DO
Commerciality means more than just 
profitability. We aim to engage in client 
relationships in a way that works for both 
the client and our business. Ultimately, 
commerciality is about how we balance 
risk and cost against potential reward.

Gender balance as at 30 June 20181 

Position

Directors

Managing Directors (meeting the definition of senior manager in the Companies  
Act 2006)

Senior managers (as per 2018 Code definition)

Senior managers’ direct reports

Total employees, partners and Directors of the Group

Female

1 of 9

3 of 27

2 of 13

11 of 22

69 of 237 

1  We are required by the Companies Act to include the gender balance of our Board and senior managers. We have previously reported 

on an internal ‘P11’ category, the highest pay grade. The Companies Act definition of a senior manager is a person who has 
responsibility for planning, directing or controlling the activities of the Company or is strategically significant.

Our employees have been recognised 
within the industry as high performing 
via a number of nominations and awards, 
including the 2018 Financial News Rising 
Star awards and three nominations in the 
Professional Pensions Women in Pensions 
awards 2018. Our employees also regularly 
present at a number of key industry 
conferences and publish articles on pension 
and other issues in print and on line.

Work/life balance and health and wellbeing
We encourage a balanced approach 
to working and offer flexible working 
arrangements to all employees. We also 
provide all employees with an opportunity 
to be covered by a comprehensive medical 
insurance scheme, which incorporates many 
health and wellbeing features, including 
personal wellbeing assessments; workshops 
on key topics like managing stress; and 
lifestyle. This scheme also incorporates a 
series of voluntary additional staff benefits.

We are a strong supporter of, and offer to  
all staff, the opportunity to benefit from 
childcare vouchers and cycle to work salary 
sacrifice schemes.

Recruitment
Our policies instil in our hiring managers 
the commitment to fair and equitable 
treatment of all employees and applicants 
in the recruitment process. During the year 
we have made some important strategic 
appointments to roles in the UK, the US 
(opening up a New York office) and Australia.

Advancement
All employees have an equal opportunity 
for advancement, including training and 
development. The Group operates an 
internal grading system which measures 
development in the organisation, supported 
by a promotion panel process.

Training, development and 
professional qualifications
We support a whole range of general and 
management training, including offering 
time and financial assistance to those 
staff members undertaking professional 
qualifications. On average staff have 
benefited from 1.5 days formal training in 
the year. We are fully supportive of Modern 
and Professional Apprenticeships, we 
pay the Apprenticeship Levy, and look to 
ensure those funds are re-invested in our 
staff across all areas of the business. During 
the year 29 employees have passed formal 
qualifications, with another 10 undertaking 
ongoing study supported by the business.

Social responsibility
This year we have established a staff-led 
Charity Committee, which coordinates a 
variety of activities across the employee 
group, raising funds for a nominated 
charity each year, and allowing employees 
to earn matching funding from the 
Company for other registered charities 
they are supporting. We have also decided 
to offer all staff the opportunity to 
undertake paid charitable volunteering 
time, of two days per person per year.

In conjunction with the Social Mobility 
Foundation, we offered some of the places 
this year on our summer intern programme to 
young people from a variety of backgrounds.

Modern slavery
We are committed to preventing acts of 
modern slavery and the occurrence of human 
trafficking in our business and supply chain. 
We expect our suppliers to uphold human 
rights and we will not tolerate modern slavery 
or human trafficking in our supply chain. 
We have developed an anti-slavery policy 
and have surveyed our largest suppliers for 
compliance with the Modern Slavery Act. 

Our modern slavery statement is 
published on our website.

Ian Iceton
Managing Director – Talent, Performance  
and Reward

40 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

STEWARDS OF  
THE ASSETS 
ENTRUSTED TO US

INVESTING
The Group considers issues of stewardship 
and the responsible investing when making 
investment decisions and engaging with 
its clients. As the Group combines asset 
management and institutional solutions, 
stewardship on behalf of our clients 
varies between divisions. The Equities 
division has direct engagement with 
companies, whilst Solutions ensure the 
underlying asset managers selected are 
fulfilling their obligations in this area. 

Equity Solutions
As equities managers, both the PVT (UK 
and Global) and ILC (Emerging Markets) 
teams believe that we are stewards of 
the assets entrusted to us by our clients 
and have a fiduciary responsibility to our 
clients to achieve strong financial returns 
over the medium term. We believe the 
management of ESG issues is important for 
the sustainability of the companies in which 
we invest and hence important for delivering 
strong long-term financial returns to our 
clients. Consequently, we have extended 
our investment process to include the 
assessment of ESG risk and opportunities 
when we analyse and review companies.

We strongly believe the best way to improve 
management attitudes is through engagement 
and peer group pressure, rather than solely 
excluding a company on ‘ethical’ grounds, 
unless specifically requested by a client. 
We mainly engage on governance issues, 
but will do on ‘environmental’ and ‘social’ 
as appropriate. Even in ‘dirty’ or ‘unethical’ 
industries we believe it is important for 
shareholders to assert pressure on companies 
to operate in the most environmental and 
social manner within the limitations of a 
particular sector. Engagement may take 
the form of voting against management or 
establishing a dialogue with management. 

Engaging with companies can be an 
important part of the investment process for 
both teams. For the PVT team, in meeting 
companies we focus on developing and 
testing our thesis for buying or holding 
a stock, evaluating management and 
improving an understanding of the business 
and strategy. Separately, we may hold 
meetings or calls with board chairmen 
and/or non-executive directors to discuss 
particular stewardship matters. Annually 
we have around 400 company meetings 
and during the year to 30 June 2018, we 
engaged with 26 companies on stewardship-
related issues. Company meetings are not 
specifically part of the ILC process, however 
in certain cases, contact with companies is 
made as part of the due diligence process. 

We regard voting at company general 
meetings as an important aspect in improving 
the stewardship of a company in the interests 
of all stakeholders. The fundamental principles 
of our voting policy are included in the 
RAMAM corporate governance voting and 
engagement policy and applied in the vast 
majority of cases. We discourage passive 
box ticking and aim to take an informed and 
pragmatic approach to voting. We will give due 
consideration to the specific circumstances 
and facts available to each investor before 
voting. For UK companies, we support a 
‘comply or explain’ approach to corporate 
governance and generally endorse the UK 
Corporate Governance Code. We expect UK 
companies to explain and justify any reasons 
for non-compliance, and to outline their 
plans for compliance in future. In the case 
of non-compliance, we reserve the right to 
accept or reject the explanation. For non-UK 
companies, we are supportive of similar codes. 

The overriding objective of the companies 
we invest in should be to optimise over time 
the returns to its shareholders. Where other 
considerations affect this objective, we believe 
they should be clearly stated and disclosed. 
To achieve this objective, the company should 
endeavour to ensure the long-term viability 
of its business, and to manage effectively 
its relationships with stakeholders.

We have extended  
our investment 
process to include the 
assessment of ESG 
risk and opportunities 
when we analyse and 
review companies.

We discourage passive 
box ticking and aim to 
take an informed and 
pragmatic approach  
to voting.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

41

Our offices have video conference facilities 
which are used extensively for client meetings 
to reduce travel for us and our clients. We 
use standard technology systems so that 
documents can be transmitted electronically. 

Our travel reimbursement policy encourages 
staff to use public transport, where available, 
when attending client meetings. 

We are conscious of our impact on the 
environment and have recycling programmes 
for paper and plastics and encourage 
conservation of water and other resources. 

In selecting suppliers we consider their 
environmental policies as a factor in 
selection. The largest suppliers in the period 
have been professional service firms.

CARBON NEUTRAL
The Group’s calculated emissions 
figure is 1,166 tonnes of CO2, including 
all travel and commuting.

The Group is committed to minimising its 
impact on the environment and as such fully 
offsets its emissions in recognised offset 
schemes, combining green energy funding 
and forestry protection and renewal. 

The Directors are therefore pleased to report 
that the Group has once again been certified 
carbon neutral by Natural Capital Partners.

By order of the Board.

Jonathan Dawson
5 October 2018 

In the year to 30 June 2018, we voted at 1,009 
company general meetings, voting against 
management on at least one resolution at 
64% of these meetings. During this period, 
we appointed a director of ESG within 
the investment team, recognising that 
the analysis of ESG risks/opportunities is 
becoming an integral part of our company 
research process and to increase our 
direct engagement with companies. 

More information on our approach to 
stewardship is available on the Group’s 
website (www.riverandmercantile.com), 
including RAMAM corporate governance 
voting and engagement policy and UK 
Stewardship Code statement. Separate 
to this, the Group is also in the process of 
signing up to the UN backed Principles for 
Responsible Investment (UNPRI) and expects 
to be a signatory within the next year. 

Solutions
As an investment consulting and fiduciary 
management business, River and Mercantile 
Solutions have been evolving our approach 
to ensure ESG issues are integrated into our 
investment processes and client engagement.

Over the last year, we have enhanced our 
manager research process and engagement 
with buy-rated managers on ESG, and 
continue to work towards ensuring ESG is fully 
integrated into our investment process. We 
are engaging with our clients by adding an 
ESG assessment into our quarterly monitoring 
reports, manager rating and manager 
selection documentation as well as providing 
briefing notes and training on ESG. This has 
been aided by ensuring our consultants are 
appropriately trained to deal with ESG issues 
and indeed they have attended a number of 
presentations from external managers.

We have also signed up to an industry initiative 
(driven by UK Sustainable Investment and 
Finance Association and Association of 
Member Nominated Trustees), where we 
commit to increased engagement both with 
our staff but also clients on these issues. 

ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS: 
GREENHOUSE GASES
We have our primary offices in London, Boston 
and Chicago, and are establishing a presence 
in New York and Australia. Our UK client base 
is predominantly in and around London and 
in the north of England. Our US client base 
is predominantly in Boston and New York.

We estimate that 85% of our employees 
utilise public transport on a daily basis to 
commute to work. Approximately 5% of 
our employees cycle to work daily and we 
have facilities in our office to encourage this 
activity, including a cycle to work scheme. 

42

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

JONATHAN DAWSON
Chairman

Background and experience
Jonathan was appointed to the 
Board on 1 October 2017.

Jonathan has extensive financial services, 
pensions and non-executive experience. 
Jonathan started his career in the Ministry of 
Defence before joining Lazard, the investment 
bank, where he spent over 20 years. He 
left Lazard in 2005 and cofounded Penfida 
Limited, the leading independent corporate 
finance advisor to pension fund trustees.

Jonathan currently serves as a non-executive 
director and chair of the remuneration 
committee of National Grid plc and is 
the chairman of Penfida Limited.

Most recently Jonathan served as senior 
independent director and chair of the 
audit and risk committee of Jardine Lloyd 
Thompson Group plc. Jonathan previously 
served as senior independent director and 
chair of the remuneration committee of 
Next plc. Jonathan has also chaired three 
pension scheme boards of trustees. Other 
previous appointments include non-executive 
director of GallifordTry plc, National 
Australia Group Europe Limited and Standard 
Life Investments (Holdings) Limited.

Committee membership
–  Nominations Committee (Chair)

MIKE FAULKNER 
Chief Executive Officer

JAMES BARHAM 
Deputy Chief Executive Officer

Background and experience
Mike founded River and Mercantile (formerly 
P-Solve) Investments Limited in 2001 to 
offer proactive and strategic advice to 
pension scheme trustees and corporate 
clients. River and Mercantile Investments 
Limited became one of the first investment 
consultants in the UK to offer Fiduciary 
Management to pension schemes.

He has 27 years of consulting and asset 
management experience, including senior 
roles with what is now Willis Towers Watson 
Ltd and Gensec International. Mike ranked top 
of Financial News’s annual survey of Europe’s 
most influential asset managers in 2011.

Background and experience
James founded River and Mercantile Asset 
Management (RAMAM) in 2006 with the 
backing of Pacific Investments Management 
Limited and was its Chief Executive Officer 
until merger in 2014. He was previously 
part of the team which founded and floated 
Liontrust Asset Management plc, where 
he was responsible for the institutional 
business. This followed senior roles with 
Shandwick Consultants and James Capel 
Investment Management and as sales and 
marketing director for Intermediate Capital 
Group plc. James served in the Royal Welch 
Fusiliers after completing his education at 
the Royal Military Academy Sandhurst. 

ANGELA CRAWFORD-INGLE 
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

ROBIN MINTER-KEMP 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Background and experience
Angela is a chartered accountant with 
extensive audit experience of multinational 
and listed companies. As a partner at 
PricewaterhouseCoopers, she specialised 
in financial services for 20 years – leading 
the Insurance and Investment Management 
division. Retiring in 2008, she is a partner in 
Ambre Partners, advising entrepreneurial 
companies. Angela is a non-executive director 
of Beazley plc and Swinton Group Limited 
where she chairs the audit committee.

Committee membership
–  Audit Committee (Chair)

–  Risk Committee

–  Remuneration Committee

–  Nominations Committee 

Background and experience
Robin has more than 25 years’ experience in 
the fund management industry, holding senior 
positions with Henderson Investors and HSBC 
Asset Management before joining Cazenove 
Fund Management in 2001. Over the next 
13 years he was instrumental in developing 
Cazenove’s specialised investment business, 
building external funds under management 
from £300m to £6.5bn ahead of the business’ 
acquisition by Schroders plc in July 2013. 

Committee membership
–  Audit Committee

–  Risk Committee

–  Remuneration Committee (Chair)

–  Nominations Committee 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

43

JACK BERRY 
Executive Director

Background and experience
Jack established River and Mercantile 
Investments Limited’s advisory capabilities, 
enabling pension schemes to use derivatives 
in liability-driven investments to hedge their 
principal risks. With more than 25 years’ 
experience, he is a key point-of-call for 
trustees and sponsors. Jack began his career 
at Ernst & Young LLP and then Standard 
Chartered Bank plc, before running his own 
corporate finance business in Zimbabwe. 

KEVIN HAYES 
Global Head of Solutions and 
Chief Financial Officer

Background and experience
Kevin is an international CFO with 25 
years’ experience in financial services. 

Kevin began his career at Ernst & Young and 
was a partner in the New York office covering 
financial services audit and consulting clients. 
He moved to Lehman Brothers where he held 
various roles including: Global Capital Markets 
controller, international CFO for Europe and 
Asia and head of productivity and process 
improvement. In 2007 Kevin joined Man Group 
PLC in London as group CFO and executive 
director on the group board. He was also a 
trustee of the Man Group PLC pension plan.

JOHN MISSELBROOK
Independent Non-Executive Director

JONATHAN PUNTER 
Non-Executive Director

Background and experience
Jonathan founded Punter Southall Group 
Ltd with Stuart Southall in 1988 and is 
the Group’s chief executive. He has more 
than 30 years in the actuarial profession, 
with particular expertise in UK pensions 
and investment strategy. He is a specialist 
on the issues surrounding pensions in 
mergers, buy-outs and due diligence deals. 
A qualified actuary, he began his career with 
Duncan C Fraser, where he was a partner. 

Background and experience
John was appointed to the Board 
on 16 February 2018.

John has extensive financial services and 
non-executive experience. John currently 
serves as chairman of JPMorgan Chinese 
Investment Trust Plc, chairman of Northern 
Trust Global Services Plc and as a non-
executive director and chairman of the risk 
and remuneration committees of Brown 
Shipley & Co. Limited. John was formerly 
chairman of Aviva Investors and served as 
the chief operating officer of Baring Asset 
Management Limited for 11 years.

Committee membership
–  Audit Committee

–  Risk Committee (Chair)

–  Remuneration Committee

–  Nominations Committee 

44 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

Jonathan Dawson
Chairman

COMPLIANCE WITH THE CODE
The Board recognises the benefits of good 
corporate governance and is committed to the 
principles of corporate governance contained 
in the UK Corporate Governance Code (the 
Code), issued by the Financial Reporting 
Council (FRC) in April 2016. This section of the 
Annual Report describes how the Company has 
applied the main principles set out in the Code.

The Code is available from the FRC’s 
website (https://www.frc.org.uk/directors/
corporate-governance-and-stewardship). 

The Board has carried out a review of 
their compliance with the relevant Code 
provisions throughout the year and 
confirms that the Company has complied 
with the relevant provisions of the Code.

In November 2017, the FRC announced a 
consultation on a fundamental review of the 
2016 Code. The Company carefully reviewed 
the proposed changes to the Code and 
submitted a response to the FRC consultation. 
On 24 July 2018, the FRC published the revised 
Code (the 2018 Code) which will apply to the 
Company from 1 July 2019. The 2018 Code 
is one of the key elements of the changes 
to the UK corporate governance framework 
recommended by the government. 

The Board ensures that it keeps up to date 
with corporate governance developments 
and best practice. The Board has assessed 
the implications of the 2018 Code and 
will be working over the next year to 
implement the changes required to 
ensure compliance with the 2018 Code.

Board and Committee member attendance for the period ended 30 June 2018

Director

Meetings held during year

James Barham

Jack Berry

Angela Crawford-Ingle

Jonathan Dawson (appointed 
01/10/17)

Mike Faulkner

Kevin Hayes

Robin Minter-Kemp

John Misselbrook (appointed 
16/02/18)

Jonathan Punter

Peter Warry (retired 31/10/17)

Board 
quarterly

4

4

4

4

3/3

4

4

4

1/2

3

1/1

Board  
ad hoc

10

9

9

8

7/7

9

10

10

3/4

8

3/3

Audit and  
Risk

Audit

Risk

Remuneration

Nominations

5

n/a

n/a

5

3/3

n/a

n/a

5

n/a

n/a

n/a

1

n/a

n/a

1

n/a

n/a

n/a

1

1/1

n/a

n/a

1

n/a

n/a

1

n/a

n/a

n/a

1

1/1

n/a

n/a

9

n/a

n/a

4/4

2/2

n/a

n/a

9

4/4

n/a

n/a

2

n/a

n/a

2

1/1

n/a

n/a

2

0/0

n/a

1/1

Where a Director has been 
appointed or has retired, 
meeting attendance is 
shown against the number 
of possible meetings they 
could have attended rather 
than the annual number of 
meetings.

Where ad hoc Board 
meetings have been held 
for a specific purpose to 
discuss matters at short 
notice, all Board members 
are sent papers and given 
the opportunity to 
comment by telephone or 
email if they are unable to 
attend at short notice.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

45

LEADERSHIP
The Board has provided the Company with 
entrepreneurial leadership and is responsible 
for the long-term success of the Company. 

CHAIRMAN
During the past financial year, Peter Warry 
retired as Acting Chairman and Senior 
Independent Director. Following the 
Nominations Committee process detailed 
below, Jonathan Dawson was appointed 
as Chairman on 1 October 2017. Peter 
Warry retired on 31 October 2017.

The roles of the Chairman and the Chief 
Executive Officer are clearly established. 
Jonathan Dawson is responsible for the 
leadership of the Board, setting the 
Board’s agenda and ensuring constructive 
relations between Executive and Non-
Executive Directors (NEDs). He also 
maintains appropriate contact with major 
shareholders in order to understand their 
concerns, if any, relating to governance, 
strategy and remuneration. 

Mike Faulkner, as Chief Executive Officer, is 
responsible for the day-to-day management  
of the Company.

BOARD COMPOSITION
As at 30 June 2018, the Board comprised 
nine directors: the Chairman, three 
independent NEDs, a non-independent 
NED and four Executive Directors. As the 
Company is a smaller company, as defined in 
the Code, it is in compliance with the Code 
requirement B1.2 relating to the number 
of independent Directors on the Board. 

No individual or group of individuals 
dominates the Board or its decision making. 

The NEDs provide constructive challenge 
in respect of matters before the Board and 
help to develop proposals on strategy. The 
Board is satisfied that the NEDs provide 
a robust and independent element on the 
Board. They bring well-considered and 
constructive opinions, skill and knowledge 
to Board discussions. The Chairman holds 
meetings with the NEDs without the Executive 
Directors present on a regular basis. 

INDEPENDENCE
Angela Crawford-Ingle, Robin Minter-Kemp 
and John Misselbrook have been determined 
by the Board to be independent (the iNEDs). 
The Board has determined that each iNED is 
independent in both character and judgement. 
There are no relationships or circumstances 
which are likely to affect or appear to affect 
the iNEDs judgement or independence. 

On appointment, Jonathan Dawson met the 
independence criteria set out in the Code.

Jonathan Punter is not considered to be 
independent by virtue of his shareholding 
and directorship in PSG, a controlling 
(38.1%) shareholder of the Company.

APPOINTMENTS TO THE BOARD
The Board has established a Nominations 
Committee to lead the process for Board 
appointments and to consider the balance 
of skills, experience and knowledge on 
the Board. The Nominations Committee 
ensures that there is a formal and rigorous 
process for appointments to the Board. 

During the course of the past financial year, 
the Nominations Committee has led the 
process for the appointment of Jonathan 
Dawson as Chairman and John Misselbrook 
as NED and chair of the Risk Committee. 

This process involved the development 
of objective criteria for each role and the 
appointment of an external recruitment 
agency to conduct a candidate search 
– this agency was independent and had 
no connection to the Group. A long-list 
of potential candidates was provided to 
the Nominations Committee for review 
and following such review, a short-list of 
candidates for interview was finalised. A series 
of interviews were held with the prospective 
candidates by the NEDs and Executive 
Directors. Feedback from these interviews 
was provided to the Nominations Committee. 

Both the appointment of Jonathan Dawson 
as Chairman and John Misselbrook as 
NED and the Chair of the Risk Committee, 
were unanimously recommended by 
the Nominations Committee. 

Following the retirement of Peter Warry, 
Angela Crawford-Ingle was appointed as 
the Senior Independent Director (SID). 

The Nominations Committee also considered 
and recommended to the Board the 
appointment of Angela Crawford-Ingle as SID.

The Board decided to split the Audit 
and Risk Committee into two separate 
committees to allow for each committee 
to have sufficient time to consider audit 
and risk matters on a standalone basis. In 
February 2018, the Board appointed John 
Misselbrook as Non-Executive Director to 
chair the newly formed Risk Committee. 

The first separate Audit Committee and Risk 
Committee meetings were held in May 2018.

All Directors are subject to annual re-election 
at the Company’s AGM.

Appointments to the Board are made on 
merit and are based on an evaluation of the 
skills and relevant sectoral experience of the 
candidates. The Board has not established 
a formal policy on diversity to date – it is 
however on the agenda of matters to be 
considered in the 2018/19 financial year as 
part of a broader people strategy project. 

The Nominations Committee and Board 
are cognisant that diversity is more than 
gender and are committed to a diverse 
and inclusive workforce. The Company 
has appointed Ian Iceton as the Managing 
Director of Talent, Performance and Reward 
to oversee the implementation of the Group’s 
talent management strategy and career 
development for all staff. Further details about 
diversity in the Group are contained in the 
corporate responsibility report on page 40.

New Directors are given a tailored induction 
arranged by the Company Secretary, which 
includes meetings with senior management, 
including the Head of Legal, Risk and 
Compliance and relevant business heads 
across the Group’s operating divisions. 

COMMITMENT
The Board requires all Directors to devote 
sufficient time to their duties and to use 
their best endeavours to attend meetings. 

During the past financial year, the NEDs’ 
letters of appointment were reviewed and 
updated. Each letter of appointment sets 
out the time commitment required for the 
role and sets the term of the appointment 
for three years. As part of the Nominations 
Committee’s appointment process, other 
significant commitments of candidates 
are considered and any new appointments 
or significant interests are required to be 
approved by the Nominations Committee. 

ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The Board meets on a scheduled quarterly 
basis and on an ad hoc basis as required. 
The Board attendance of the Directors 
is set out in the table on page 44. 

A comprehensive set of papers is circulated 
before Board and Committee meetings using 
an online board pack portal. The Company 
Secretary advises the Board on all governance 
matters. All Directors have access to the 
Company Secretary’s services and advice.

The Board has a formal schedule of matters 
reserved for its decision. Examples of these 
matters include the approval of the  annual 
operating and capital expenditure budgets and 
any material changes to them, the approval 
of major capital projects and appointments 
to and removals from the Board.

COMMITTEES
The Board has established Nominations, 
Remuneration, Audit and Risk Committees. 
The composition of these committees 
complies with the requirements of the 
Code. The Company Secretary advises 
and supports these Committees. 

The Chairman is not a member of the 
Remuneration, Audit and Risk Committees, 
but attends these meetings at the invitation 
of the Chairs of the respective committees.

46 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT CONTINUED

The Board has formally defined and 
documented, by way of terms of reference, 
the duties and responsibilities delegated 
to the Board committees and these 
are available on the Group’s website 
(www.riverandmercantile.com).

PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
The Executive Directors have been 
evaluated individually and as a group 
against their individual and collective 
objectives. Details of their individual and 
collective performance are summarised in 
the Remuneration Committee Report.

Jonathan Dawson’s formal appraisal will 
take place within the next financial year 
before the anniversary of his appointment, 
and will be led by the SID with the NEDs. 
However, during the year, Jonathan has 
had a performance evaluation with the 
SID as part of an internal Board and 
Committee evaluation process which was 
coordinated by the Company Secretary. 

The evaluation process involved the 
completion of anonymous questionnaires 
collated by the Company Secretary and 
a series of one-to-one meetings with the 
Chairman. The evaluation process sought 
individual Directors’ assessments of the 
Board’s effectiveness including strategy 
development, the decision making process, 
Board relationships, information flows and 
the operation of the Board Committees. 
The review concluded that the Board and 
its Committees are operating effectively 
and to a high standard of governance. The 
SID has led the review of the performance 
evaluation of the Chairman through one-to-
one meetings with the NEDs and Executive 
Directors. This is supplemented by the Board 
evaluation process which also evaluates 
the performance of the Chairman.

VIEWS OF SHAREHOLDERS
The Board actively solicits the views of 
shareholders through face-to-face meetings 
with major shareholders, investor road 
shows and ad hoc contact. The views of 
shareholders are reported back to the Board. 

RELATIONSHIP AGREEMENT
PSG currently holds 38.1% of the issued 
share capital of the Company. By virtue of 
the size of its shareholding in the Company, 
PSG is a controlling shareholder for the 
purposes of the Listing Rules and was 
required to enter into an agreement with 
the Company to ensure compliance with 
the independence provisions set out in the 
Listing Rules (Relationship Agreement).

The Relationship Agreement regulates 
the ongoing relationship between the 
Company and PSG. Subject to PSG 
holding in aggregate 10% or more of the 
Group’s issued share capital, PSG is able to 
nominate a NED to the Board – Jonathan 
Punter is PSG’s nominated NED.

The Relationship Agreement enables 
the Company to carry on its business 
independently of PSG and its respective Group 
undertakings and ensure that all agreements 
and transactions between the Company on the 
one hand, and PSG and/or any of its respective 
Group undertakings and/or persons acting 
in concert with it or its Group undertakings 
on the other hand, will be at arm’s length 
and on a normal commercial basis.

The Company has complied with the 
independence provisions in the Relationship 
Agreement. So far as the Company is 
aware, the independence provisions 
included in the Relationship Agreement 
have been complied with by PSG and its 
associates; and the procurement obligation 
included in the Relationship Agreement 
has been complied with by PSG.

POWER OF DIRECTORS IN RESPECT OF 
SHARE CAPITAL
The Directors may exercise all the powers 
of the Company (including, subject to 
obtaining the required authority from the 
shareholders in general meeting, the power 
to authorise the issue of new shares and the 
purchase of the Company’s shares). Since 
its shares were listed on the London Stock 
Exchange on 26 June 2014, the Directors 
have not exercised any of the powers to 
issue or purchase shares in the Company.

Jonathan Dawson
Chairman

AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE REPORT

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

47

Angela Crawford-Ingle
Chair, Audit Committee

This year we will be increasing our oversight of 
risk itself in the business and its management 
across the Group and this has been reflected in 
changes to the Board and Board Committees.

In February, the Group welcomed John 
Misselbrook to the role of Non-Executive 
Director. John brings significant experience 
of risk matters to the Group – his other roles 
include chair of the risk committee of Brown 
Shipley & Co. Limited, and he was formerly 
chairman of Aviva Investors and COO of 
Barings Asset Management Limited.

A combined Audit and Risk Committee 
structure was appropriate for the period 
since IPO, however the growth of the 
Group and the evolving regulatory climate 
means we had reached a stage where audit 
and risk matters were better dealt with in 
separate forums. Therefore, the Audit and 
Risk Committee has been split into separate 
Audit and Risk Committees, with the first 
formal meetings under the new remits held 
in May. The terms of reference for both 
Committees can be found on the Group’s 
website (www.riverandmercantile.com).

I have remained as Chair of the Audit 
Committee, with John chairing the Risk 
Committee. As the combined Audit and 
Risk Committee structure was in place for 
the majority of the year I am providing a 
single report covering both areas; but we 
will provide separate reports next year. As 
a result, references in this report to 'the 
Committee' encompass both old and new 
Committees for the year under review.

We believe that this new structure provides 
a clearer focus on risk, and is supported by 
changes within the business, including the 
appointment of a standalone Chief Risk Officer 
for the Group, who has now joined us. This 
represents an ongoing journey for the Group, 
and we look forward to reporting on further 
improvements in next year’s Annual Report.

REGULATORY CHANGE
Whilst the potential challenges associated 
with the UK’s withdrawal from the EU 
increasingly loom large, there have continued 
to be a number of significant regulatory 
changes which the Group has had to 
manage; in particular MiFID II and GDPR.

January 2018 saw the implementation of 
MiFID II, the scale and impact of which, as 
most are aware, is hard to underestimate. 
I am pleased that implementation across 
the Group has been dealt with in a calm and 
orderly fashion. Like many organisations 
we did have some teething troubles, for 
example in respect of transaction reporting 
systems, but attention has turned now 
to seeking assurance as to the successful 
embedding of relevant changes and 
compliance with the requirements. 

In last year’s report I 
noted that a key area  
of focus was enhancing 
the Group’s risk-based 
compliance oversight. 
Accordingly, an ongoing 
assessment of the 
effectiveness of our 
compliance function  
and related systems  
and controls has been 
central to the work  
of the Committee in  
the period. 

Changes have been delivered, and 
improvements have been and continue to be 
made, but in a time of business expansion 
and ongoing regulatory change we don’t 
propose to ease up as we seek to deliver 
continuous improvement. We have added to 
the resources performing this critical second 
line function and will continue to do so; we 
expect more from them accordingly. The 
majority of the oversight will pass to the Risk 
Committee going forward but as a member 
of that Committee and aligned with the other 
members of the Board, I will be making sure 
that we keep the pressure on to deliver.

48 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Not all of the impact of MiFID II will be seen 
until firms have to deal for the first time 
with new requirements which are in certain 
cases required to be performed or reported 
on annually post implementation. So while 
the implementation date may have passed I 
consider that in many ways to have been the 
'end of the beginning'; success in respect of 
certain of the real challenges remains to be 
proven so we do not relax our vigilance.

The implementation in May of the General 
Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), an EU 
wide initiative to enhance protection for 
individuals with respect to their personal 
and sensitive data is a similar case. As for 
MiFID II, a tremendous amount of pre-
implementation effort was required with 
clients, third-party service providers and 
internally and this too was handled calmly, 
but the real work of measuring the success 
with which change has been embedded 
begins now and we take nothing for granted. 
The Group was not required to nor has it 
appointed a Data Protection Officer for 
GDPR purposes but it has promoted a 
member of the legal team to act as Privacy 
Officer to oversee GDPR related matters. 

Finally, in July 2018 the CMA released 
its provisional decision report and 
recommendations following its investigation 
into the investment consulting and fiduciary 
management market. As with the other 
matters the Group responded well to the 
demands placed upon it in providing a very 
significant number of data items to the 
CMA over the period of the investigation. 
The CMA’s report is a complement to the 
FCA’s ongoing work on the implementation 
of change post its Asset Management 
Market Study. That work continues and 
will deliver requirements for change which 
the business will need to react to. Across 
both reports there is much to support in 
the calls for more effective competition, 
better client outcomes, clearer disclosure 
in all areas to facilitate those outcomes and 
greater governance and accountability. 
The output from the CMA and FCA reports 
will certainly occupy both the Audit and 
Risk Committees in the coming period.

Whilst we naturally welcome many of the 
changes brought about by the matters 
above, there is no escaping the fact that 
responding to them can put operational strain 
on a small organisation such as our own. I 
would therefore like to personally thank the 
many people involved for their hard work 
during the year and on a continuing basis in 
facilitating such positive outcomes. We see 
the pace of change continuing, and this will 
continue to require our focus and resource.

OTHER SIGNIFICANT EVENTS
There were two other events this year in 
which the Committee was closely involved. 

The first was the FCA Competition matter, 
which from an accounting standpoint led to 
the recognition of a provision of £1m in the 
interim accounts, which was subsequently 
reduced to £109,000 following specific 
guidance from the FCA. This matter was 
treated with the utmost seriousness. A 
thorough investigation was immediately 
undertaken – both internally and with the 
assistance of outside counsel – to not only 
identify the specific facts of the matter, but 
also to rigorously examine the Group’s relevant 
policies, controls and processes for any 
weakness or gap. Where necessary, changes 
and improvements were made to reflect the 
lessons learnt and these changes were, in 
turn, independently tested to assess their 
effectiveness. We have cooperated fully with 
the FCA throughout and continue to do so.

The second was the dismissal of a portfolio 
manager for professional conduct 
breaches. These matters are rarely easy 
and require sensitive consideration, but 
management showed decisiveness in 
making a difficult, but necessary decision.

MEETING ATTENDANCE
The Audit and Risk Committee met five times 
during the year, with the separate Audit 
and Risk Committees meeting once each. 
The Committees invite other participants 
as appropriate, including the Chairman; 
divisional COOs; the Group CFO; Deputy 
CFO; Head of Legal, Compliance and Risk; 
external parties in addition to the auditors 
such as service providers and insurers; and 
other Directors who are not Committee 
members. The Committee also holds 
executive sessions with only Committee 
members present, from time to time.

EXTERNAL AUDITOR INDEPENDENCE, 
OBJECTIVITY AND EFFECTIVENESS
The Committee has reviewed auditor 
independence at a number of meetings 
and is satisfied that the auditor remains 
independent and objective.

During the year the auditor has provided 
effective challenge on a number of issues, 
including the ongoing disclosure and 
recognition of amounts in respect of the 
FCA competition matter and the review of 
subsidiary investments for indications of 
impairment. The Committee has found that 
they demonstrate professional scepticism 
when reviewing the positions taken by 
management on significant matters 
which affect the financial statements, 
including those discussed below.

The auditor has attended all meetings, 
and has input into discussions at those 
meetings. In doing so, I believe that they 
have helped to ensure that decisions 
are appropriately weighted by adding 
robust and constructive challenge.

EXTERNAL AUDITOR APPOINTMENT
The re-appointment of BDO LLP was 
approved by shareholders at the 2017 AGM, 
with 99.8% of the votes cast being in favour 
of the motion. The Committee has considered 
the continuing appointment of BDO LLP as 
the Group’s external auditors and is satisfied 
as to the scope of the audit. The Committee 
has also reviewed BDO’s remuneration. 

BDO LLP has been the Group’s auditor  
since IPO in 2014, and the Committee has 
recommended its re-appointment for the 
coming year to the Board. Under the Statutory 
Audit and Third Country Auditors Regulations 
part 3, the Group is required to ensure the audit 
is subject to a public tender not later than 2024. 

INTERNAL CONTROL AND RISK 
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
At each meeting, the Committee receives 
reports from the divisional COOs covering 
relevant control and risk issues. We also 
receive reporting from Compliance and 
Legal functions on matters of relevance, 
including in respect of emerging risks. The 
new Chief Risk Officer has joined us with a 
remit to assess the effectiveness of all risk 
systems and controls, and to improve their 
robustness, means to measurement and 
the quality of resulting risk management 
information, we look forward to taking our 
risk management oversight to the ‘next level’. 

I am the Group’s whistleblowing champion 
and the Committee has also recently reviewed 
the operation and effectiveness of the Group’s 
whistleblowing processes, systems and 
controls, by which staff may, in confidence, 
raise concerns about possible wrongdoing 
in the Group. Changes to the updated policy 
and procedures include the introduction of 
an independent whistleblowing resource 
and helpline. There have been a number 
of high profile whistleblowing cases 
recently so this review has been timely; 
the Committee is satisfied that the revised 
provisions are appropriate for the Group.

As with most businesses, the Group is heavily 
reliant on IT in order to conduct its business 
– from electronic communications to the 
trading systems and data used to originate 
and process transactions. We have therefore 
spent a significant amount of time on the 
Group’s arrangements in these areas. 

Recently, an IT disaster recovery (DR) test 
was performed to simulate a full failure of 
the main IT infrastructure. All services were 
restored in the DR environment within the 
target recovery times set. This result provides 
comfort that were the worst to happen, the 
impact is minimised and we intend to repeat 
the process at least annually, supported 
by tests on specific areas as needed.

We are also cognisant of the increasing risk 
faced by all businesses from cybercrime, and 
therefore I am pleased to note that following 
independent third-party penetration testing, 
the Group’s IT infrastructure has been 
certified as ‘Cyber Essentials’ compliant.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

49

INTERNAL AUDIT
The Group has not historically had a 
dedicated internal audit function, but 
has appointed third parties to carry out a 
number of targeted checks in the year as 
directed by the Committee or the Board, 
including in this period a review of systems, 
controls and governance in RAMAM. The 
Committee actively monitors the need for 
internal audit and having relied in the past 
on the use of targeted reviews, the decision 
has been taken that it is now appropriate to 
formalise internal audit on an ongoing basis. 
The Group therefore expects to appoint 
a permanent internal audit resource to 
provide improved third line assurance to the 
Committee and to the Board going forward. 

FINANCIAL REPORTING
A key objective for the Committee is 
ensuring that the Group’s financial reporting 
is reliable and appropriate and that the 
UK Code requirements of fair, balanced 
and understandable (FBU) are met.

The Committee has considered reports 
from management and BDO LLP relating 
to the Annual and Interim Reports, and 
trading updates. Additionally, management 
submit reports on the financial reporting 
process and significant accounting 
matters, including those below.

As part of their engagement with the 
Group, BDO LLP also report on internal 
control recommendations that they have 
noted during their work. The Committee 
reviews these items and monitors delivery 
of improvements against them.

SIGNIFICANT ISSUES
The Committee has considered a 
number of significant financial issues 
and judgments during the year which 
impact this Annual Report, including:

1. Accounting for employee and Director 
share schemes, and remuneration deferrals 
pursuant to UCITS V
The Group has a number of share schemes, 
including the EPSP for Directors, and PSP 
and DEP for all staff. The EPSP awards 
a variable number of shares based upon 
achievement of certain TSR objectives 
between June 2014 and June 2018. 

Following the determination of the 
Remuneration Committee as to the number 
of shares which will be subject to vesting 
in June 2019, the Committee reviewed 
papers from management outlining 
the accounting entries which result.

In respect of UCITS V deferrals, the Committee 
considered papers from management 
detailing the approach taken to accounting 
entries, and the main assumptions made.

2. Viability statement
The viability statement relies upon an 
assessment of the Group’s ability to continue 
in operation and meet its liabilities as they 
fall due. This assessment is predominantly a 
financial one, with links to the key risks which 
the Group faces. As a result, the Committee 
has played a role in its review and challenge.

3. Revenue recognition
Incorrect recognition of revenue is a risk 
in any business. The Group’s contracts 
are generally similar to each other in 
nature. The Committee reviews both the 
accounting policies surrounding revenue 
recognition and reports from management 
on the controls and processes in place to 
ensure accurate reporting of revenue. 

Additionally, the Committee reviewed reports 
from management detailing their assessment 
of the upcoming IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from 
contracts with customers’ and the fact that 
it is not expected to materially impact on 
revenue recognition in subsequent periods.

RISK MATTERS 2018
We have considered a wide-range of internal and external matters during the year, including:

–  Regulatory change and the Group’s response to it – MiFID II, GDPR, UK bank ring-fencing;

–  IT matters including cyber security and results of disaster recovery testing;

–  Risk implications of fund launches including the Global Macro Fund;

–  Compliance reporting and reporting from divisional COOs into specific areas of the business;

–  Policy matters, with an emphasis on conflicts of interest and related matters; and

–  The CMA investigation into investment consulting and fiduciary management and related 

output from the FCA’s Asset Management Market Study.

In the coming year, the Risk Committee’s agenda will include:

–  Work towards the implementation of the Senior Managers and Certification Regime for 

asset managers in December 2019;

–  Scrutiny of key outsource providers; and

–  Consideration of the impacts of the UK’s withdrawal from the EU.

4. Impairment of investments and 
intangibles
The Group has goodwill and intangibles 
on consolidation, and the Company 
holds investments in subsidiaries 
on an unconsolidated basis. The 
Committee reviews periodic reports 
from management as to indications of 
impairment and the results of impairment 
testing, to ensure that management’s 
assertions as to the recoverability of 
carrying values are supportable.

5. Completeness of cost, contingent 
liabilities and provisions
Cost completeness is a key risk in all 
businesses. The Committee has reviewed 
significant business matters and areas subject 
to estimation during the year, to ensure 
the inclusion of related costs in the correct 
accounting period as well as the need for any 
additional cost recognition or disclosure.

In relation to the accounting for the FCA 
Competition matter, the Committee 
continued its oversight of the matter, 
including correspondence from the FCA and 
legal advisors. It also considered accounting 
papers addressing provisions held during 
the year, the details of the matter and 
the requirements of IAS 37 – Provisions, 
contingent liabilities and contingent assets.

ANNUAL REPORT
The Committee has reviewed the contents of 
the Annual Report and financial statements 
and advised the Board that, taken as a 
whole, it is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy.

FINANCIAL REPORTING COUNCIL LETTER 
The Group received a letter from the Financial 
Reporting Council (FRC) in February 2018 
requesting details of the approach to, and 
basis for, the disclosures of investment 
performance in our Annual Report for the 
year ended 30 June 2017. The letter followed 
from a complaint regarding the presentation 
of investment performance metrics in the 
accounts of asset management companies. 
The Group explained the approach taken 
and the rationale, enabling the FRC to 
conclude its enquiry into our presentation. 
In response to the FRC letter, the Group 
clarified in its 2018 Interim Report that the 
investment performance which is disclosed, 
is gross of the Group’s management fees. 

AUDIT QUALITY REVIEW
In respect of the year ended 30 June 2017, the 
audit of the Group was subject to a review by 
the FRC’s Audit Quality Review team as part 
of its routine programme of audit firm quality 
inspections. The Audit Committee considered 
and discussed with the audit engagement 
partner the review team’s findings and noted 
there were no significant issues reported.

Angela Crawford-Ingle
Chair, Audit Committee

50

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

Robin Minter-Kemp
Chair, Remuneration Committee

Dear Shareholder,

On behalf of the Remuneration Committee 
(the Committee), I am pleased to present  
the Remuneration Committee report 
setting out how the current remuneration 
policy (the Policy) has been implemented 
for the year ended 30 June 2018.

OVERALL REMUNERATION RATIO

52%

WHAT IS OUR POLICY DESIGNED  
TO ACCOMPLISH?
In some aspects, our Policy is intentionally 
bespoke, as we are unable to compare 
ourselves against conventional asset 
managers given the complexity of our 
business in providing investment solutions 
for the vast majority of our clients. 

The Policy includes a maximum remuneration 
ratio cap of 54% of net management and 
advisory fees plus 50% of performance  
fees. Within this, we remunerate our 
employees and also incentivise our Executive 
Directors by rewarding short and long-term 
accomplishments. We explicitly link their 
bonuses both to earnings growth and also to 
achieving investment returns for our clients, 
by sharing in performance fees achieved.  
This enables our shareholders, clients and 
Executive Directors to share in the success  
of the client and Group outcomes.

WHAT ARE OUR KEY POLICY AIMS?

–  Close alignment between remuneration 
levels and the delivery of client desired 
outcomes;

–  A transparent approach to sharing the 
financial performance of the Group 
between employees (including the 
Executive Directors) and shareholders;

–  Ensuring that higher levels of 

remuneration are only delivered for 
exceptional long-term growth and 
performance;

–  A clear understanding of expectations 
with regard to performance outcomes 
resulting from implementation of the 
Group’s strategy into financial and 
non-financial outcomes;

–  A clear understanding by our employees 
and the Executive Directors of their 
remuneration outcomes, including their 
expectations regarding the components 
of remuneration and how this is linked to 
their individual, divisional and the Group’s 
performance;

–  An alignment to effective risk 

management, and personal and collective 
conduct through: malus adjustments; 
clawback capability; and retention 
periods, including compliance with the 
FCA’s Remuneration Codes and UCITS V 
where applicable.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

51

THE CHART BELOW ILLUSTRATES HOW 
THE GROUP’S ADJUSTED REVENUE 
AND EXPENSES ARE DISTRIBUTED TO 
STAKEHOLDERS, INCLUDING STAFF 
AND EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS.

2017

Employee remuneration 
42%
(excl. payroll taxes) 
Dividends 
23%
Operating expenses incl. depreciation  17%
5%
Executive Director remuneration 
4%
Retained and other 
9%
Taxes 
4%
5%

Corporation tax 
Payroll tax 

2018

Employee remuneration 
39%
(excl. payroll taxes) 
Dividends 
19%
Operating expenses incl. depreciation  19%
8%
Executive Director remuneration 
4%
Retained and other 
11%
Taxes 
6%
5%

Corporation tax 
Payroll tax 

HOW HAVE THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS 
BEEN REWARDED?
The implementation report highlights the 
incentives we provide in order to ensure that 
the remuneration of the Executive Directors 
and the value we deliver to our clients and 
shareholders are closely aligned. Achieving an 
appropriate balance between rewarding short-
term performance and longer-term investment 
in growth has been a key focus of the 
Committee since the Policy was implemented. 

The Policy with regard to variable pay 
for Executive Directors has enabled the 
recognition of exceptional performance 
whilst apportioning less compensation 
for lower levels of performance. This 
approach to rewarding performance has 
been implemented across the business 
and is firmly embedded in our culture. 

All our employees are eligible for bonus 
payments, which they receive in cash and 
longer-term share awards depending on 
seniority and level of performance during the 
year. In setting employee bonuses we follow 
the same approach of ensuring alignment 
of objectives and remuneration to desirable 
outcomes, both from a commercial as well 
as conduct perspective with remuneration 
modification where behavioural outcomes 
have been below expectation.

The Executive Directors were assessed against 
a number of metrics as itemised in last year’s 
financial report. These measurable outcomes 
were derived from the Group category 
objectives and included Group financial 
metrics, distribution, investment performance 
and other personal individual objectives. 
These were measured on a weighted basis by 
individual in apportioning variable awards. 
The outcomes were then reviewed by the 
Committee including an assessment of 
individual performance. This ensured that 
the final result reflected the Committee’s 
view of performance, conduct, culture and 
leadership contribution to the Group.

The result of the assessment is that the total 
Executive Director remuneration including 
long-term incentive awards is 41% of the 
maximum under the Policy. The current 
year awards (cash plus performance fee) 
are 24% of the maximum; and the cash 
component of variable remuneration is 
on average 2.3 times base salary, with a 
portion of this subject to further deferral.

The Committee reviewed the Group’s position 
and prospects, and awarded an average of 
3.1 times base salary in long-term incentive 
awards (LTIA), contingent upon achieving 
adjusted underlying diluted EPS growth above 
a hurdle, combined with personal objectives. 

The amount of the LTIA for Executive 
Directors represents partly the new roles they 
have undertaken – James Barham, recently 
appointed as Deputy CEO and Kevin Hayes 
becoming Global Head of Solutions – as well 
as weighting incentives more towards future 
revenue expansion. This is in line with the 
Policy and provides forward-looking incentives 
for Executives to continue to drive earnings 
growth to the benefit of all shareholders.

It’s worth remembering the 52% 
compensation ratio includes the Group’s 
investment in future growth, including 
key appointments in the US and Australia, 
and also in research and development, 
highlighted in Mike Faulkner’s CEO's review.

Immediately prior to the Group’s IPO in 
2014, the Executive Performance Share 
Plan was established. This reached the end 
of its performance measurement period 
in June, with only 32% of the potential 
maximum number of shares being eligible 
for vesting in June 2019 subject to continued 
employment by the individual at that time.

The Committee concluded that the total 
shareholder return (TSR) based performance 
condition set at the establishment of the 
plan was unsatisfactory. This is because 
the performance of the Group’s share price 
was influenced by many factors which were 
outside of the Executive Directors’ control. 
The new LTIA arrangements approved last 
year with EPS growth targets are designed 
to address these deficiencies and we believe 
provide better clarity of outcome and 
therefore alignment between shareholders 
and Executive Directors through mutual 
sharing of performance-led growth.

ARE ANY FUTURE CHANGES ENVISAGED?
During the year, the Committee has 
continued to review our policy on Executive 
remuneration. We will shortly be at the first 
anniversary of our new policy approved by 
shareholders at the 2017 AGM. We recognise 
that Directors’ remuneration is an area where 
requirements and expectations continue 
to evolve and this has led us to consider 
further development of our approach. We 
therefore intend to conduct a policy review in 
consultation with shareholders following the 
2018 AGM, with the likelihood of submitting 
a new policy proposal at the 2019 AGM.

Accordingly, on behalf of the Committee, 
I commend this report to you and ask for 
your approval at the AGM in December.

Robin Minter-Kemp
Chair, Remuneration Committee

Total remuneration and benefits including EPSP

Adjusted profit before tax

Distribution to shareholders in respect of the year (pence per share)

2018

39.0

21.8

18.6

2017

36.9

23.4

19.7

% change

5.7%

(6.8)%

(5.6)%

52

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

SUMMARY OF CURRENT REMUNERATION POLICY
Executive Directors’ remuneration is determined in accordance with the remuneration policy adopted at the Group’s AGM held on 8 December 
2017. The full Policy can be found in the corporate governance section of the Group’s website (www.riverandmercantile.com).

Executive Director remuneration comprises base salary, pension and other benefits; and variable remuneration in the form of a cash bonus, a 
performance fee bonus, and long-term incentive awards in either equity or fund units.

The Policy includes overall Group remuneration capping at 54% of net management and advisory fees, plus 50% of performance fees, as well as 
deferrals in respect of performance fee bonuses. 

Malus applies to all awards during the performance assessment and award setting process, and both the vesting and holding period. Clawback 
will apply to cash variable remuneration and performance fee remuneration for a period of 12 months in case of material financial misstatement 
or serious personal misconduct.

The Policy also requires Executive Directors to acquire and retain at least 200% of base salary in Group shares within five years of taking office.

The chart below shows the actual remuneration this year, compared to the maximums under the Policy. This excludes payments made under the 
EPSP, which are legacy payments made under the previous remuneration policy.

Total remuneration (£m)
8

65%

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

57%

57%

57%

12%

48%

28%

12%

Actual

18%

13%

4%

Max

21%

16%

6%

Max

10%
46%

32%

13%

Actual

21%

16%

6%

Max

56%

28%

16%

Actual

21%

16%

6%

Max

49%
47%
53%

Actual

£'000

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

 Performance fee bonus1

 LTIA1

 Cash bonus2

 Base3

350

1,350

800

340

5,000

1,350

1,012

340

–

281

–

312

3,0004

1,124

843

312

240

1,100

770

305

3,0004

1,100

825

305

–

1,100

550

305

3,0004

1,100

825

305

1 
2 
3 
4 

Performance measures relating to greater than one year period.
Performance measures relating to a one year period. 
Base includes salary, fees, benefits and pension. Performance measures relating to a one year period.
Performance fee bonus relating to Kevin Hayes, Jack Berry and James Barham is subject to a maximum pay-out of £3m between the three directors.

Audited

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

53

REMUNERATION IMPLEMENTATION REPORT

REVIEW OF THE FINANCIAL AND NON-FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2018
The Committee has reviewed the Group’s Key Performance Indicators and other metrics in assessing the performance of the Executive Directors 
against their specific individual performance objectives for 2018.

Business outcomes 2018
Client outcomes as measured by net flows and investment performance:
–  Fee earning AUM/NUM increased by 9% to £34bn;

–  Net inflows were £2.1bn in the year, with net sales of £1.1bn and positive rebalancing flows of £1.0bn;

–  Australian business AUM grew to £455m, with New Zealand adding a further £180m to total £635m in the region;

–  Positive investment performance in all divisions added £0.7bn; and

–  Above benchmark performance across all strategies where performance was the objective, with the exception of US Fiduciary.

Shareholder outcomes as measured by our financial performance:
–  Net management and advisory fees increased by 15%;

–  Management fee margins have been maintained across all divisions. Overall margin increased by one basis point reflecting the increase in higher 

margin Equity Solutions AUM during the year;

–  Performance fees for the 12 months ended 30 June 2018 were £11m;

–  Underlying remuneration ratio was 53%;

–  Administrative expenses were 22% of net management and advisory revenues;

–  Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin of 25%, compared to 29% in the prior year;

–  Statutory earnings per share of 18.83 pence, compared to 16.45 pence in the prior year; 

–  Dividends declared and proposed of 18.6 pence per share, compared to 19.7 in the prior year; and

–  Diluted underlying EPS of 15.42 pence per share, compared to 14.97 pence in the prior year.

Other outcomes:
–  Presence established in Australia with a new senior hire and New York office launched with two new senior hires;

–  Decisive action taken to improve conduct; and

–  Product development pipeline strong, including the launch of the Global Macro Fund.

Executive Director pay decisions for 2018
The Committee’s overall 2018 remuneration decisions for each Executive Director are summarised below together with comparable figures for 2017.

Year ended 30 June 2018 

£

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Year ended 30 June 2017 

£

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Base salary

337,480

280,800

275,000

275,000

Base salary

306,800

280,800

250,000

250,000

Taxable
benefits1

Annual cash

bonus2,3

Long Term 
Incentive

Awards3,4

Pension
contribution5

Performance 
fee bonus

Total

2,681

2,681

2,681

2,681

800,000 1,350,000

–

350,000 2,840,161

–

281,000

28,080

–

592,561

770,000 1,100,000

27,500

240,000 2,415,181

550,000 1,100,000

27,500

– 1,955,181

Taxable
benefits1

Annual cash

bonus2,3

Performance 
shares
award3,4

Pension
contribution5

Performance
fee bonus6

2,821

2,821

3,961

2,821

613,600

584,000

–

504,000

–

28,080

500,0003

251,0003

7,500

500,0003

245,0003

25,000

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

Total

1,507,221

815,701

1,012,461

1,022,821

1. Taxable benefits consist of life assurance, critical illness cover and private medical insurance.
2. Annual bonus is gross cash paid or payable in respect of the financial year.
3. Bonus includes deferred awards pursuant to UCITS V, under the Group’s Deferred Equity Plan (‘DEP’).
4. Long Term Incentive award (LTIA) is the face value of awards granted in the year, which vest in future periods.
5. Pension contribution includes cash allowances and contributions made to self-invested personal pensions.
6. Performance fee bonus is a component of the 2018 Remuneration Policy and so was not applicable in the prior year.

 
54

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Annual cash bonus
Each Executive Director was assessed against a number of financial and non-financial metrics on a consistent basis in order to determine their 
performance against the targets in the Policy and their resulting remuneration outcomes.

Performance metrics
The metrics used to evaluate Executive Director performance were grouped into four areas:

Group financial metrics:
The Group objectives were measured for the Group overall and the Executive Directors are accountable and evaluated as a team with regard to 
meeting these objectives. Given the spread of responsibilities amongst the Executive Directors each has a direct influence over these Group 
outcomes. Metrics included:

–  Growth in net management and advisory revenue, organically, at a minimum of 12% per annum;

–  Growth in underlying pre-tax margins to >30% over the medium term, by growing remuneration and administration expenses at a lower rate 

than net management and advisory fees; and

–  Growth in adjusted underlying earnings per share, with a target this year of 13%.

Distribution objectives:
This measured the specific sales performance of the relevant Executive Director within their business area. It captured both the aggregate sales  
and redemptions in absolute terms and also the regretted institutional attrition (RIA). Management fee revenue growth is measured both in  
terms of the absolute revenue earned in the year as well as on an in-force basis in order to reflect the differing product margins within the Group. 
Metrics included:

–  Sales growth and redemption levels;

–  Absolute and in-force revenue growth and mandate pipeline;

–  Regretted institutional attrition rate;

–  Diversification of distribution channels; and

–  Increased penetration of existing distribution channels, including Australia and the US.

Investment performance objectives:
This measured the specific contribution of individuals to the investment process, including as reflected in AUM/NUM growth through performance. 
Across the Group’s range of strategies, the delivery of investment outperformance against the stated benchmark is evaluated, together with the 
growth and management of the available investment management capacity. Metrics included:

–  New product launches to broaden investment solutions and increase investment capacity; and

–  Above benchmark investment performance.

Individual objectives:
These measure the delivery of other objectives within the Group, including the ability to deliver talent development and succession planning 
effectively, and an assessment of an individual against conduct and other behavioural requirements. 

They also measured the success of the individual in achieving their personal objectives set at the start of the year as measured by the Committee.

–  Talent development;

–  Client engagement;

–  Governance, culture and conduct; and

–  Other individual-specific objectives.

Weighting of objectives
The allocation and weighting of criteria between individual Executive Directors depends on the nature of their specific role and their ability to 
influence the outcomes and is weighted according to the following table, subject to overall Committee evaluation of the individual’s performance in 
the year.

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Group 
financial

Distribution

Investment 
performance

Individual 
objectives

60%

40%

40%

65%

–

30%

30%

–

20%

10%

10%

–

20%

20%

20%

35%

Total

100%

100%

100%

100%

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

55

Evaluation of Executive Director performance

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Group 
financial

Distribution

Investment 
performance

Individual 
objectives

Overall

1-2

1-2

1-2

1-2

n/a

1-2

4-5

n/a

3-4

3-4

4

n/a

4-5

1-2

4-5

4-5

3-4

1-2

4

3

0 = Below Threshold, 1 = Threshold, 2 = Expected, 3 = Above Expectation, 4 = Exceptional, 5=Maximum

Group 
Organic net management and advisory fee growth at 12.4% was just above the 12% per annum expectation. Both other measures in the Group 
section – growth in adjusted underlying pre-tax margin and growth in adjusted underlying EPS – did not reach the threshold level of 1% and 13% 
respectively, so achievement was below Expected.

Distribution
During the period James Barham was responsible for distribution activities in our asset management division and this showed very strong levels of 
new sales across institutional and wholesale client types in the UK, US and Australasian region. This was delivered at largely consistent margins, 
leading to positive revenue outcomes.

Whilst RIA increased, this was mainly driven by the impact of a single Derivatives mandate which, whilst we remain appointed by the client, is yet to 
renew having reached maturity. 

Separately, following the dismissal of a portfolio manager, James’ teams worked effectively to limit client redemptions in a number of areas. Taking 
account of all of these factors, the Committee awarded James a score of Exceptional.

The distribution achievements in Solutions (which Jack Berry led) were lower. Advisory revenues reduced slightly due to a lack of project fee 
recurrence and the growth rate of new fiduciary mandates was less than budgeted. Whilst the Committee accepts that the ongoing CMA review 
had suppressed new client volumes, these results meant Jack Berry performed below Expected.

James Barham has been promoted to the new role of Deputy CEO and in this role will assume responsibility for all the underlying operating 
businesses across Solutions and Asset Management and also will take responsibility for distribution across the Group.

Investment performance
Investment performance continued to be strong. This is particularly true in the Equity Solutions division under James Barham. New product 
launches were slightly below expectation, however the Global Macro Fund was launched and has performed strongly in absolute terms since it was 
fully seeded by the Group in March following a short test-trade period. As a result, Mike Faulkner and Jack Berry were graded as Above Expectation 
and James Barham was Exceptional.

Individual performance
Individual summary – Mike Faulkner
–  Significant investment in key management roles globally;

–  Significant progress on Group strategy development;

–  Innovation in investment research and development;

–  Positive investment performance in all divisions added £0.7bn to AUM/NUM;

–  Above benchmark performance across all strategies where performance was the objective, with the exception of US Fiduciary (-0.6%);

–  Performance fees for the 12 months ended 30 June 2018 were £11m;

–  Administrative expenses were 22% of management and advisory revenues; and

–  Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin was 25%.

Individual summary – Jack Berry
–  Advisory revenues reduced slightly due to a lack of project fee recurrence and the growth rate of new Fiduciary Management mandates was 

lower than budgeted;

–  Positive opening of the New York office;

–  Business achieved better than targeted compensation ratio for the year; and

–  New business pipeline positive but revenue growth over this period was below target.

56

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Individual summary – James Barham
–  Fee earning AUM/NUM increased by 9.0% in the year to £34bn;

–  Sales for the period were £5.7bn, including £3.9bn from Derivative Solutions and £1.3bn from Equity Solutions;

–  Gross inflows for the 12 months were £5.7bn equivalent to 18% of opening AUM/NUM;

–  Net inflows for the 12 months were £2.1bn, equivalent to 7% of opening AUM/NUM;

–  Equity Solutions performance fees of £2.4m;

–  Proactive action taken on conduct related matters;

–  Following the departure of a portfolio manager, James’ team worked effectively to limit client redemptions;

–  Opening of offices in Australia;

–  Australian business AUM grew to £455m, with New Zealand adding a further £180m to total £635m in the region;

–  Investment performance continued to be strong. This is particularly true in the Equity Solutions division; and

–  Some important talent development achievements. 

Individual summary – Kevin Hayes
–  Continued strengthening of governance processes;

–  Proactive action taken on conduct related matters;

–  Successful development of risk functions, with recent hire of a Chief Risk Officer; 

–  Effective people development in corporate functions, including development of Finance function; and

–  Led on investor relations, and contributed to a 'client' engagement score of above expectation.

Cash variable remuneration
Based upon the Policy, the performance outcomes above and the Committee’s consideration, the following cash bonus outcomes (subject to UCITS 
V deferrals) have been awarded:

Executive Director

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry1

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Cash bonus £

800,000

–

770,000

550,000

1  In an environment that was difficult for the Solutions business, we expect Executives to expect their pay to vary consistently with this and Jack’s cash bonus has been affected accordingly. This change is 

specific to Jack as head of Solutions during the year.

Performance fee bonus
Three of the Executive Directors are also eligible to share in the performance fees generated by the Group. Performance fee bonus awards were 
made to James Barham and Mike Faulkner to recognise their contribution to performance fees in Equity Solutions and Fiduciary Management 
respectively. Following consideration of the performance fee levels in the year, and each Director’s role in their generation from a distribution and 
investment management perspective, the Committee awarded £350,000 to Mike Faulkner, £240,000 to James Barham and £nil to Jack Berry.

Performance share awards
Under the terms of the Policy, Executive Directors are eligible for Long Term Incentive Awards of up to 400% of base salary each year.

The awards are subject to pre-grant conditions which the Committee believes will provide an incentive to drive future growth. This is in line with 
the Policy and provides forward-looking incentives for Executives to continue to drive earnings growth to the benefit of shareholders.

In setting the appropriate award levels, consideration was given to the roles and responsibilities of each of the Executive Directors and their role 
in EPS growth alongside their performance during the year.

Mike Faulkner’s focus on investment idea generation and role as Chief Executive Officer means that he will be key to continued delivery of the 
Group’s impressive investment performance track record, as well as new product development with products such as the Global Macro Fund, 
with which he is closely involved. The Group’s strong investment performance is not only a differentiator of our business, but also drives 
underlying revenue growth and excess returns in the form of performance fees. He was therefore awarded the maximum award subject to the 
future vesting conditions, details of which are set out below.

James Barham has been recently appointed as Deputy CEO responsible for the management of all our operating businesses. He is also 
responsible for global distribution including the Group’s new presence in Australia, an important market for growth. He was therefore awarded 
the maximum award, subject to the future vesting conditions.

Kevin Hayes has been recently appointed Global Head of Solutions. The Solutions division generated 49% of the Group’s total revenue during 
the year, and the combination of strong investment performance and recent recruitments along with the completion of the CMA review, 
provides an improved environment to accelerate client wins. It also includes the US business, which again has been an area of recent investment 
for growth in the form of the New York office. Kevin also retains his role as CFO. He was therefore awarded the maximum award, subject to the 
future vesting conditions.

Audited

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

57

Jack Berry has recently changed role to help clients with more complex needs adopt strategies to exploit macro conditions most effectively. This 
again is important to the aspirations of the Group in servicing existing and new clients across the Group. However, his role is less directly linked 
to driving growth in EPS than the other three Executive Directors. He was therefore made an award of one times salary, subject to the future 
vesting conditions.

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

 LTIA award 
for year £‘000

Award multiple 
of base salary

1,350

281

1,100

1,100

4

1

4

4

Vesting conditions
The Committee has determined that the Executive Directors’ awards will only vest in full if growth in the Group’s adjusted underlying diluted 
earnings per share (aEPS) of 20% p.a. is achieved between 30 June 2018 and 30 June 2021. No awards will vest if the annualised aEPS for that 
period is less than 10% p.a., and the awards will vest proportionally on a straight-line basis if the aEPS is between 10-20% p.a. This performance 
metric is consistent with the Policy, and reflects the role of the awards in driving close alignment between management and shareholders, 
generally leading to increased returns, as measured by earnings per share.

In addition, the individual awards will also be subject to a downwards-only adjustment at the sole discretion of the Committee. This adjustment 
will include consideration of conduct and other personal performance factors over the EPS measurement period. Input will be sought from 
support functions such as Risk and Legal, and alongside the clawback provisions in the policy this emphasises the Committee’s determination  
to ensure that growth is delivered in a sustainable and risk-appropriate fashion.

UCITS V deferrals 
During the year, Kevin Hayes and James Barham were involved with the management and oversight of RAMAM, a UCITS management company 
which is subject to the UCITS V rules on variable remuneration set out in the FCA Handbook (SYSC 19E). Accordingly, a portion of their variable 
remuneration is subject to the UCITS V rules which require that such portion is paid through a combination of upfront and deferred cash, and 
deferred and retained UCITS units. This portion is determined by an assessment of the time spent by Kevin and James on the management of 
RAMAM, plus an analysis to assess the split of remuneration between UCITS and non-UCITS business managed by RAMAM. UCITS V remuneration 
rules require that a proportion of the cash and LTIA detailed above is in the form of a holding in the UCITS funds. Vesting of the UCITS V deferral  
will not be subject to a TSR target but will be subject to malus adjustment provisions, and UCITS V remuneration requirements relating to deferral 
periods and the retention of units. The table below reflects the proposed UCITS V deferrals impact on remuneration for James Barham and  
Kevin Hayes.

£

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Non-UCITS 
element

1,150,000

–

925,600

477,200

Cash and performance fee bonus 

UCITS 
non-deferred 
cash award

UCITS 
non-deferred 
instrument
award1

Non-UCITS 
element

LTIA

UCITS 
3 years 
deferred cash 
award 

UCITS 
3 years 
deferred 
instruments

– 

– 

–  1,350,000

– 

281,000

–

–

–

–

Total variable 
remuneration

2,500,000

281,000

42,200

36,400

42,200

973,400

36,400

990,800

63,300

54,600

63,300

2,110,000

54,600

1,650,000

1. All UCITS instrument awards are subject to an additional six month retention period prior to being transferred to the recipient. 

Review of the Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration
Mike Faulkner’s cash bonus has increased from £613,600 in the prior year to £1,150,000 in the current year. The total variable remuneration of the 
Group has increased by 10.5% from £15.2m to £16.7m in the same period.

Year

2018  

2017

2016

2015

2014 (six months)

Notes:
1. No shares vested during 2015, 2016, 2017 or 2018.
2. Includes share awards not included in single figure remuneration as unvested at year-end.  
3. 2014 remuneration includes £7.5m of previously issued shares in the pre IPO Group which converted into shares at the IPO.

Audited

Chief Executive 
Officer’s single 
figure 
remuneration
£

1,280,161 

923,221

309,476

309,079

Annual bonus 
payout against 
maximum  
%

37% 

83%2

21%2

0%

Long-term 
incentive 
vesting rate 
against 
maximum 
opportunity 
%

 n/a1

n/a1

n/a1

n/a1

7,801,2603

100%

100%

58

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Fixed base remuneration and benefits
The Committee believes that the appropriate starting point for fixed base pay increases for the Executive Directors is the average of the base pay 
increase for the business as a whole, which for this year is 4.6%. As a result, the Committee has granted increases of 4.6 % to Mike Faulkner, James 
Barham and Kevin Hayes, effective 1 July 2018. Jack Berry received a base pay increase of 2.4%. The change in base salaries for James Barham, 
Kevin Hayes and Jack Berry placed the three Executive Directors on the same base salary.

Following his promotion to Deputy CEO, James Barham has had a further increase in base pay of 13% to £325,000 effective from 6 September 2018.

Executive Director

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Current 
salary 
£

New 
salary 
£

337,480

353,000

280,800

287,650

275,000

325,000

275,000

287,650

Increase 
%

4.6

2.4

18.2

4.6

Pension contributions
Jack Berry and Kevin Hayes receive a cash allowance equivalent to 10% of base salary per annum.

James Barham participates in the River and Mercantile Group pension scheme. James makes a contribution of 3% of base salary, and since 1 July 
2017 the Group contributes 10% to his pension.

Mike Faulkner does not receive either a cash allowance or pension contribution.

Single figure remuneration
The following table gives the single figure remuneration of Executive Directors for 2018 and 2017 which includes the current year cash bonus 
and any previously granted deferred awards which vested in the respective year. It differs from the remuneration outcomes in the year as it 
measures share and deferred awards which vested during the year, as opposed to those which were granted.

Year ended 30 June 2018

Annual 
bonus2

Performance
shares vested4

Pension
contribution5

Total

Taxable
benefits1

2,681

2,681

940,000

–

2,681

866,0003

2,681

550,0003

–

–

–

–

– 1,280,161

28,080

311,561

27,500 1,171,181

27,500

855,181

Taxable
benefits1

2,821

2,821

3,961

2,821

Year ended 30 June 2017

Annual 
bonus2

Performance
shares vested4

Pension
contribution5

Total

613,600

504,000

500,0003

500,0003

–

–

–

–

–

923,221

28,080

815,701

7,500

761,461

25,000

777,821

£

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

£

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Base salary

337,480

280,800

275,000

275,000

Base salary

306,800

280,800

250,000

250,000

Notes:
1. Taxable benefits consist of life assurance, critical illness cover and private medical insurance.
2. Annual bonus is gross cash paid or payable in respect of the financial year.
3. Annual bonus includes deferred awards pursuant to UCITS V, under the DEP.
4. Performance shares award is the value of awards vesting during the year, including any dividends earned.
5. Pension contribution includes cash allowances and contributions made to self-invested personal pensions.

Audited

 
Strategic report

Governance

Financials

59

Executive Performance Share Plan (EPSP)
The Group adopted the Executive Performance Share Plan on 2 June 2014, prior to the Group’s IPO and listing on the London Stock Exchange.

Under the terms of the plan, the Executive Directors are each entitled to receive dilutive shares following the completion of a four year performance 
period which ended in June 2018, plus a further one year holding period to June 2019 during which time each is required to remain employed or, if 
employment ceases, be classified as a good leaver by the Committee. As a result, the shares will vest in the year ended 30 June 2019.

The number of award shares which the Executive Directors would be eligible for on vesting was determined by reference to the compound annual 
total shareholder return (TSR) over the performance period, with shares awarded in two tranches (A and B) between a TSR of 12-24% and 25-30% 
per annum respectively.

The performance period ended during the year and the TSR was calculated using the FTSE-Russell total return index methodology for dividend 
reinvestment, using a three-month volume-weighted average price on the last day of the performance period in June.

The result of this calculation, performed by the Group’s corporate brokers, was a TSR of 18.9%, leading to 57% of the A awards and none of the  
B awards becoming eligible for vesting:

‘000 
Executive Director

Mike Faulkner
Jack Berry
James Barham
Kevin Hayes

Total

Group share price and TSR performance

Original A 
shares 
awarded

Original B 
shares 
awarded

Total shares 
awarded

Shares eligible 
for vesting

821
1,396
1,231 
1,396

4,844

1,231
–
1,231
–

2,463

2,052 
1,396
2,463
1,396

7,306

471
801
707
801

2,781

% of total 
shares 
awarded 
eligible for 
vesting

23%
57%
29%
57%

38%

%
250

200

150

100

50

Jun 14

Dec 14

Jun 15

Dec 15

Jun 16

Dec 16

Jun 17

Dec 17

Jun 18

R&M Share price
R&M Total shareholder return
MSCI UK Financials share price
MSCI UK Financials total shareholder return

During the one-year holding period, the Executive Directors are entitled to dividends on the eligible awards, which will be accounted for by 
increasing the ultimate number of shares which vest on a re-investment basis. As a result, the ultimate number of shares will be higher than those 
shown above.

Summary of remuneration and distributions

£m

Total Group remuneration

EPSP (credit)/expense

Distributions to shareholders recorded in period

Distributions to shareholders with respect to period (pence per share)

Year ended 
30 June 2018

Year ended 
30 June 2017

Movement

39.6 

(0.1) 

17.5 

18.6

35.3

1.6

9.3

19.7

4.3 

(1.7) 

8.2 

(1.1)

60 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Non-Executive Director remuneration
The table below shows the total remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors paid during the years ended 30 June 2018 and 30 June 2017. 
Jonathan Punter’s fees were paid directly to PSG.

£

Angela Crawford-Ingle

Jonathan Dawson

Robin Minter-Kemp

John Misselbrook

Jonathan Punter

Peter Warry (retired 31 October 2017)

£

Paul Bradshaw (passed away 12 January 2017)

Angela Crawford-Ingle

Robin Minter-Kemp

Jonathan Punter

Peter Warry

1. Non-Executive additional fees include fees for Board Committee positions.
2. Additional base fees for acting Chairman from 13 January 2017.
3. Remuneration to the date of resignation.

Year ended 30 June 2018

Base fees

57,166

112,500

42,500

18,727

42,500

32,5423

Additional
fees1

8,000

 –

8,000

–

–

–

Year ended 30 June 2017

Base fees

64,167

42,500

42,500

42,500

Additional
fees1

–

8,000

8,000

–

73,9492

9,6142

Non-Executive Director fee review
The Non-Executive Directors’ fees were reviewed in 2016, and were increased based upon fees for comparable listed companies and following 
consultation with major shareholders. No fee review has been conducted in the current year. The Chairman’s fee is fixed for three years following 
his appointment.

Personal shareholding 
The Policy requires that Executive Directors hold at least two times their base salary in Group shares within five years of their appointment, 
including awards which have vested but are subject to holding conditions. 

The table below shows the shareholding of the Executive and Non-Executive Directors (and persons closely associated with them) as at  
30 June 2017 and 2018. All Executive Directors held at least two times their base salary in Group shares, as required by the Policy.

Shareholding

Mike Faulkner

Jack Berry

James Barham

Kevin Hayes

Angela Crawford-Ingle

Robin Minter-Kemp

Jonathan Punter1

Peter Warry

Jonathan Dawson

John Misselbrook

1. Jonathan Punter holds a 7.4% interest in PSG. PSG has a 38% interest in the Company.

30 June 2018

30 June 2017

Number of 
ordinary 
shares

Percentage of 
issued share 
capital

Number of 
ordinary shares

Percentage of 
issued share 
capital

Movement

Movement %

3,706,823 

4.51%  3,706,823

2,210,619 

2.69%  2,210,619

1,095,843 

1.33%  1,095,843

318,296 

0.39% 

252,865

19,924 

30,000 

– 

0.02% 

0.04% 

– 

13,661

25,269

– 

13,661 

0.02% 

13,661

60,000

0.07%

–

–

– 

–

4.52%

2.69%

1.33%

0.31%

0.02%

0.03%

0.00%

0.02%

–

–

–

–

–

–

6,263

4,731

–

–

–

–

–

–

4.6%

18.7%

–

–

60,000

100%

–

–

Audited

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

61

Advisors
The Committee received independent advice on material matters, including :

–  Advice from McLagan International Inc. on market conditions and competitive rates of pay;

–  Compensation design advice from Willis Towers Watson;

–  General advice from the Company Secretary and HR; and

–  Advice on specific matters from Pinsent Masons LLP and Addleshaw Goddard LLP.

Statement of voting at 2017 AGM

Resolution

Votes cast 
excluding 
withheld

Votes for

Votes against Votes withheld

To approve the Directors’ report on remuneration for the year ended 30 June 2017 

83.17% 

99.72% 

0.28% 

– 

To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Policy

83.15%

74.70%

25.30%

15,000

Prior to the 2017 AGM, significant shareholders were consulted regarding the planned resolutions. After the vote further conversations were held, 
especially with the largest shareholder who voted against the proposals. We have factored their comments in and will be addressing their concerns 
in the 2019 Policy review. Discussions around the current results will also be held with shareholders prior to this year’s AGM.

Compliance and risk management in remuneration
The Chairman of the Committee also serves on the Audit and Risk Committees and the Chair of the Audit Committee also sits on the Committee.

In determining remuneration, the Committee take account of reports from the Group’s Risk, Legal and Compliance teams, and the Audit and Risk 
Committees as to conduct and risk outcomes, and any remuneration changes which should reasonably follow.

 The Group’s remuneration policies and practices take account of applicable law and regulations, corporate governance standards, best practice 
and guidance issued by regulators and by representative shareholder bodies.

Accordingly, the Group’s Deferred Equity Plan provides that, at the discretion of the Committee, deferred awards may be reduced or lapsed in the 
event of certain malus scenarios including a material misstatement of the Group’s financial results or misconduct by an individual. The DEP rules 
have been amended during the period to provide for the ability of the Committee to clawback awards that have vested (note this will only apply to 
awards made after 30 June 2018).

Outlook for 2018/19
The Committee intends to measure Executive performance in the coming financial year in a similar manner under the Policy as has been detailed in 
this report, applying the same metrics, save that the recent changes to Executive roles and responsibilities may be reflected in different weightings 
between the four performance categories: Group; distribution; investment performance; and personal.

The Policy was presented to shareholders for approval at the Group’s 2017 AGM and next year will represent its second year of operation. During 
this time the Committee has continued to see an evolution in remuneration policy practice within the financial services sector and more broadly. 
We therefore intend to undertake a further review of our policy in consultation with main shareholders, which we believe is likely to result in a new 
policy presented in the 2019 Annual Report for consideration of shareholders at the Group’s 2019 AGM.

Approved and signed on behalf of the Board.

Robin Minter-Kemp
Chair, Remuneration Committee

62

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

The Directors present their report and the Group’s audited financial statements for the year 
ended 30 June 2018. 

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES AND BUSINESS REVIEW 
The Company’s principal activity is to act as a holding company for a group of investment 
advisory and management companies. The Company is a public limited company incorporated in 
England and Wales under registered number 04035248. The Group operates principally in the UK 
and has a trading subsidiary in the US. One of the Group’s trading subsidiaries is registered as a 
foreign registered entity in Australia. A review of the business is set out in the Strategic Report 
on pages 1 to 41, which is incorporated by reference into this report.

BOARD OF DIRECTORS
The Directors of the Company as at the date of this report are set out below. Their biographies 
are set out in the Governance section on pages 42 and 43. 

Director

James Barham
Jack Berry
Angela Crawford-Ingle
Jonathan Dawson
Mike Faulkner
Kevin Hayes
Robin Minter-Kemp
John Misselbrook
Jonathan Punter

Date of appointment

27 March 2014
30 June 2009
29 May 2014
1 October 2017
30 June 2009
15 April 2014
12 May 2014
16 February 2018
30 June 2009

The Directors have agreed to voluntarily retire from the Board at the AGM and, being eligible, 
will stand for re-election by the members, with exception of John Misselbrook who will be 
standing for election this being the first AGM since his appointment. 

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS
Directors’ interests in the shares of the 
Company are disclosed in the Directors’ 
remuneration report on page 60. No Director 
had a material interest in any significant 
contract (other than a service contract) with 
the Company at any time during the year.

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ 
RESPONSIBILITIES
This statement, which is included 
later in this section, is deemed to form 
part of this Directors’ report.

CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
A Director has a statutory duty to avoid a 
situation in which they have or could have 
a conflict of interest or possible conflict 
with the interests of the Company. 

The Company has adopted a policy relating 
to the handling by the Company of matters 
that represent conflicts of interest or 
possible conflicts of interest involving the 
Directors. The Board will regularly review 
all such matters, and the Company’s 
handling of such matters, save that only 
Directors not involved in the conflict or 
potential conflict may participate in any 
discussions or authorisation process. 

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITIES AND 
INSURANCE
The Company maintains appropriate 
insurance cover in respect of litigation 
against Directors and Officers. 

The Company’s Articles of Association 
permit the provision of indemnities to the 
Directors. In accordance with the Articles of 
Association, qualifying third party indemnity 
provisions (as defined in the Companies 
Act 2006) are in force for the benefit of 
Directors and former Directors who held 
office during the year to 30 June 2018 and 
up to the signing of the Annual Report. 

DIRECTORS’ SERVICE AGREEMENTS AND 
LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT
Each Executive Director has a written 
service agreement, which may be 
terminated by either party on not less 
than 12 months’ notice in writing.

Each NED has a written letter of appointment 
for a term of three years, which may be 
terminated by either party on not less than 
three months’ notice in writing. The NED 
letters of appointment are available for 
inspection at the Company’s registered office 
during business hours and at the AGM.

COMPENSATION FOR LOSS OF OFFICE
There are no agreements in place between 
the Company and any Director or employee 
for loss of office in the event of a takeover.

CHANGE OF CONTROL
The Company does not have agreements 
with any Director or employee that would 
provide compensation for loss of office or 
employment resulting from a change in a 
control following a takeover bid, except that 
provisions of the Company’s share schemes 
may cause awards granted under such 
schemes to vest in those circumstances.

MANAGEMENT REPORT
For the purposes of Disclosure and 
Transparency Rule 4.1.8, this Directors’ 
report combined with the strategic report 
comprises the management report.

DIVIDENDS
The Directors have proposed a final dividend 
of 5.5 pence per ordinary share (2017: 6.0 
pence). Payment of this dividend is subject to 
approval by shareholders at the Company’s 
2018 AGM and, if approved, it will be paid  
on 14 December 2018 to shareholders on  
the register at the close of business on 
23 November 2018.

INTERNAL CONTROL AND RISK 
MANAGEMENT 
Details of how the Board monitor the Group’s 
internal control and risk management 
approach can be found in the Risk 
management section of the Strategic  
Report on page 32. The Directors have carried 
out a robust assessment of the principal 
risks facing the Group including those that 
would threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity. 

CAPITAL STRUCTURE
As at 30 June 2018, there were 82,095,346 
ordinary shares of 0.3 pence each. Each 
share in issue is listed on the Official List 
maintained by the FCA in its capacity as the 
UK Listing Authority. There have been no 
changes to the share capital during the year.

The Company has one class of ordinary share 
which carry the right to attend, speak and vote 
at general meetings of the Company. Further 
details regarding the exercise of voting rights 
at the AGM are set out in the Notice of AGM. 

Each ordinary share in the capital of the 
Company ranks equally in all respects. 
No shareholder holds shares carrying 
special rights relating to the control of the 
Company. The Company is not aware of 
any agreements between shareholders 
that may result in restrictions on the 
transfer of shares or on voting rights.

The Company has not been granted the 
authority to buy back its own shares. 
Accordingly, no shares have been bought 
back by the Company during the period.

CONTROLLING SHAREHOLDER
Punter Southall Group Limited (PSG) is 
deemed to be a controlling shareholder under 
the Listing Rules. Accordingly, the Company 
has entered into a Relationship Agreement 
with PSG as required by the Listing Rules in 
connection with the exercise of their rights 
as major shareholders in the Company and 
their right to appoint a Director to the Board. 
These agreements are further detailed in 
the Corporate Governance Report in the 
Relationship Agreement section on page 46. 

SHARES HELD IN AN EMPLOYEE BENEFIT 
TRUST
Shares are held for the benefit of Group’s staff 
in the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust 
(EBT) in order to satisfy awards under the 
Group’s non-dilutive share award plans. The 
EBT is operated by Estera (formerly Heritage 
Trustees). During the reporting period, the 
trustee of the EBT purchased 0.5m shares. As 
at 30 June 2018, the EBT held 2.20% of the 
total issued share capital of the Company.

The EBT has agreed to waive current and 
future dividends on the shares it holds. 

AUDITOR
BDO LLP, the external auditor of the Company, 
has advised of its willingness to continue in 
office and a resolution to reappoint it will 
be proposed at the forthcoming AGM. The 
Audit and Risk Committee report considers 
the independence of the auditor on page 48. 

AUDIT INFORMATION
As far as each Director is aware, there is 
no relevant information that has not been 
disclosed to the Company’s auditors. 
Furthermore, each of the Directors 
believes that all reasonable steps have 
been taken to make them aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish 
that the Company’s auditor has been 
made aware of that information. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

63

SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDINGS
As at 14 September 2018, the Company had received the notifications of control of 3% or more over 
the Company’s total voting rights and capital in issue in accordance with DTR 5 as set out below: 

Punter Southall Group Limited
Aberdeen Standard Investments
Aviva Investors
Sir John Beckwith
Legal & General Investment Management
Mike Faulkner
Unicorn Asset Management

DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION UNDER 
LISTING RULE 9.8.4R
The sections which apply to the Group are:

4 – Details of long term incentive schemes, 
which can be found in the Directors’ 
remuneration report on pages 50 to 61.

10,11,14 – Details of a contract of significance 
with a controlling shareholder, details for 
a contract for provision of services from a 
controlling shareholder, compliance with 
the independence provisions under LR 
9.2.2AR. Information on the relationship 
agreement with PSG can be found in the 
corporate governance report on page 48.

12 – Arrangements under which a 
shareholder has agreed to waive dividends. 
See section above “Shares held in an 
Employee Benefit Trust”. The other 
sections are not applicable to the Group.

GOING CONCERN
The Directors have concluded that there is a 
reasonable expectation that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future, and 
have accordingly prepared the Group and 
parent financial statements on a going 
concern basis. Please refer to the viability 
statement on page 37 for further details. 

POLITICAL DONATIONS
The Group made no political donations or 
contributions during the year (2017: £nil).

EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD
The Directors are not aware of any events after 
the reporting period which are not reflected 
in these financial statements but which 
would have a material impact upon them.

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Details of the financial instruments used by 
the Group and the risks associated with them 
(including the financial risk management 
objectives and policies, and exposure to price, 
credit and liquidity risk) are set out on pages 
87 to 90 and this information is, accordingly, 
incorporated into this report by reference.

No. of 
ordinary 
shares 

% of total 
issued share 
capital

31,302,321
5,931,944
4,826,413
4,252,163
4,058,011
3,706,823
2,875,000

38.13
7.23
5.88
5.18
4.93
4.52
3.50

Direct/
indirect

Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
Indirect
Direct

FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS
Details on the likely future developments 
for the Group can be found in the Chief 
Executive’s statement on pages 4 to 10.

GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS
Details on the greenhouse gas emissions 
of the Group can be found on page 41.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT
DTR 7.2.1 requires that the Group’s disclosures 
on corporate governance be included in 
the Directors’ Report. This information is 
presented on pages 44 to 46 in the Corporate 
Governance section and is incorporated by 
reference into this Directors’ report and 
is deemed to form part of this report.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
The AGM will be held at 88 Wood Street, 
London, EC2V 7QR on 5 December, starting 
at 9am. The Notice of Meeting convening 
the AGM is contained in a separate circular 
to be sent to shareholders. The Notice 
of Meeting also includes a commentary 
on the business of the AGM and will be 
available on the Company’s website 
(www.riverandmercantile.com).

APPROVAL OF ANNUAL REPORT
The Corporate Governance Report, the 
Strategic Report and the Directors’  
Report were approved by the Board on 
5 October 2018.

The Directors consider that the Annual 
Report and Accounts, taken as a whole 
is fair, balanced and understandable, 
and provides the information necessary 
to assess the Group’s performance, 
business model and strategy.

By order of the Board.

Sally Buckmaster
Group Company Secretary

5 October 2018

64 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 
PURSUANT TO DTR4
The Directors confirm to the best of their 
knowledge:

–  The Group financial statements have been 
prepared in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as 
adopted by the European Union and Article 
4 of the IAS Regulation and give a true and 
fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial 
position and profit and loss of the Group.

–  The Annual Report includes a fair review of 
the development and performance of the 
business and the financial position of the 
Group and Company, together with a 
description of the principal risks and 
uncertainties that they face.

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position 
of the Company and enable them to ensure 
that the financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards 
the Group financial statements, Article 
4 of the IAS Regulation. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets 
of the Company and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities. 

WEBSITE PUBLICATION
The Directors are responsible for ensuring the 
Annual Report and the financial statements 
are made available on a website. Financial 
statements are published on the Company’s 
website in accordance with legislation in the 
United Kingdom governing the preparation 
and dissemination of financial statements, 
which may vary from legislation in other 
jurisdictions. The maintenance and integrity 
of the Company’s website is the responsibility 
of the Directors. The Directors’ responsibility 
also extends to the ongoing integrity of the 
financial statements contained therein.

The Directors are responsible for preparing the 
Annual Report and the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare 
financial statements for each financial year. 
Under that law the Directors are required 
to prepare the Group financial statements 
and have elected to prepare the Company 
financial statements in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
(IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. 
Under company law the Directors must 
not approve the financial statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view of the state of affairs of 
the Group and Company and of the profit 
or loss for the Group for that period. 

In preparing these financial statements, 
the Directors are required to:

–  select suitable accounting policies and then 

apply them consistently;

–  make judgements and accounting estimates 

that are reasonable and prudent;

–  state whether they have been prepared in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the 
European Union, subject to any material 
departures disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements; 

–  prepare the financial statements on the 

going concern basis unless it is inappropriate 
to presume that the company will continue 
in business; and

–  prepare a Director’s report, a strategic 

report and Director’s remuneration report 
which comply with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

65

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF 
RIVER AND MERCANTILE GROUP PLC

OPINION
We have audited the financial statements 
of River and Mercantile Group PLC (the 
parent company) and its subsidiaries (the 
Group) for the year ended 30 June 2018 
which comprise the consolidated income 
statement, the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income, the consolidated 
and parent company statements of financial 
position, the consolidated and parent 
company statement of changes in equity, 
the consolidated and parent company cash 
flow statements and notes to the financial 
statements, including a summary of 
significant accounting policies. The financial 
reporting framework that has been applied 
in their preparation is applicable law and 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
(IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union 
and as regards the parent company financial 
statements, as applied in accordance with 
the provisions of the Companies Act 2006. 
and, as regards the parent company financial 
statements, as applied in accordance with 
the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion the financial statements:

–  give a true and fair view of the state of the 

Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs 
as at 30 June 2018 and of the Group’s profit 
for the year then ended;

–  the Group financial statements have been 

properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs 
as adopted by the European Union;

–  the parent company financial statements 

have been properly prepared in accordance 
with IFRSs as adopted by the European 
Union and as applied in accordance with the 
provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

–  the financial statements have been prepared 
in accordance with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006; and, as regards the 
Group financial statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation.

BASIS FOR OPINION
We conducted our audit in accordance 
with International Standards on Auditing 
(UK) (ISAs(UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards 
are further described in the Auditor’s 
responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We are 
independent of the Group and the parent 
company in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our audit of 
the financial statements in the UK, including 
the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to 
listed public interest entities, and we have 
fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities 
in accordance with these requirements. 
We believe that the audit evidence we 
have obtained is sufficient and appropriate 
to provide a basis for our opinion.

CONCLUSIONS RELATING TO PRINCIPAL 
RISKS, GOING CONCERN AND VIABILITY 
STATEMENT
We have nothing to report in respect of the 
following information in the Annual Report, 
in relation to which the ISAs (UK) require us 
to report to you whether we have anything 
material to add or draw attention to:

–  the disclosures in the Annual Report set out 
on pages 34–36 that describe the principal 
risks and explain how they are being 
managed or mitigated;

–  the Directors’ confirmation set out on 

page 62 in the Annual Report that they  
have carried out a robust assessment of the 
principal risks facing the Group, including 
those that would threaten its business 
model, future performance, solvency  
or liquidity;

–  the Directors’ statement set out on page 73 
in the financial statements about whether 
the Directors considered it appropriate to 
adopt the going concern basis of accounting 
in preparing the financial statements and 
the Directors’ identification of any material 
uncertainties to the Group and the parent 
company’s ability to continue to do so over  
a period of at least 12 months from the date 
of approval of the financial statements;

–  whether the Directors’ statement relating  
to going concern required under the Listing 
Rules in accordance with Listing Rule 
9.8.6R(3) is materially inconsistent with our 
knowledge obtained in the audit; or

–  the Directors’ explanation set out on page 

37 in the Annual Report as to how they have 
assessed the prospects of the Group, over 
what period they have done so and why they 
consider that period to be appropriate, and 
their statement as to whether they have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group will 
be able to continue in operation and meet 
its liabilities as they fall due over the period 
of their assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any 
necessary qualifications or assumptions.

KEY AUDIT MATTERS
Key audit matters are those matters that, 
in our professional judgment, were of most 
significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include 
the most significant assessed risks of material 
misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) 
that we identified. These matters included 
those which had the greatest effect on: 
the overall audit strategy; the allocation of 
resources in the audit; and directing the efforts 
of the engagement team. These matters 
were addressed in the context of our audit of 
the financial statements as a whole, and in 
forming our opinion thereon, and we do not 
provide a separate opinion on these matters.

66 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF 
RIVER AND MERCANTILE GROUP PLC CONTINUED

Matter

Audit response

Revenue recognition (note 3 to the Annual Report)
The Group’s revenue is made up of distinct components, primarily 
management fees, performance fees and advisory fees.

Revenue recognition is considered to be a significant audit risk as it is a 
key driver of return to investors and there is judgement over the accrual 
or deferral of revenue, the treatment of performance measures and the 
point at which it is probable that the revenue will be realised.

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles and related disclosures (note 
9 to the annual report)
Included in the statement of financial position of the Group is goodwill 
arising on business combinations of £15.2m and intangible assets 
acquired of £19.8m.

The impairment review of goodwill and other intangible assets is 
considered to be a significant audit risk due to the judgments made in 
determining whether there is an indication of impairment in respect of 
the intangible assets. These judgements are made in respect of the 
underlying assumptions used to calculate the recoverable amounts 
considered in the impairment review of goodwill, and include revenue 
growth rates, revenue multiples, ongoing expenses such as the 
remuneration ratio and the discount factor applied to present value  
the balances.

We responded to this risk by performing the following procedures:

–  We recalculated a sample of management fees recognised in the year 

based on assets under management (AUM)/ notional under 
management (NUM) information prepared by management and rates 
prevalent in the respective investment management agreements 
(IMAs). We traced the sample through to invoice and subsequent cash 
receipt, or to debtors and accrued income where relevant. We agreed a 
sample of AUM and NUM to custodian statements and Bloomberg 
valuations.

–  We recalculated performance fees due in respect of a sample of 
contracts and tested the appropriateness of the deferral of 
performance fees in accordance with the terms of the contract, the 
accounting policy and relevant accounting standards. We considered 
whether the investment management agreement mandates have been 
complied with.

–  We developed expectations of contracts that would give rise to a 

performance fee by considering underlying performance against the 
terms of the contract and compared our expectations against the 
performance fee income recognised in the accounts.

–  We vouched a sample of advisory fees to invoice and bank receipt, 
including a sample of accrued advisory fees to subsequent invoice  
and receipt.

–  We considered the completeness of advisory fees through 

consideration of on-going advisory projects and the recognition of 
retainer fees.

–  We compared invoices raised after the year end to the accrued income 
balance to check where appropriate they were recognised in the profit 
and loss account for the year.

We responded to this risk by performing the following procedures:

–  We reviewed management’s assessment of whether any indications of 
impairment existed in respect of the definite-life intangible assets and 
challenged this assessment in light of our knowledge of the Group and 
consideration of forecasts prepared by management.

–  We reviewed the value-in-use model prepared by management in order 
to calculate the recoverable amount of the IMA Intangibles and the 
RAMAM LLP cash-generating unit (CGU) in respect of goodwill. We 
re-performed the calculation of the recoverable amount. We 
challenged the key assumptions applied by management, including 
revenue growth forecasts, ongoing expenses and the discount factor 
applied. This involved understanding the basis for management’s 
assumptions and vouching these to available evidence. We consulted 
with BDO valuations specialists to determine whether the discount 
factor represented an appropriate weighted average cost of capital  
for the Group.

–  We reviewed the fair value less costs of disposal model prepared by 
management in order to calculate the recoverable amount of the 
Cassidy CGU. We re-performed the calculation of the recoverable 
amount. We challenged the key assumptions applied by management, 
including the revenue multiple used and the estimated costs to sell. We 
consulted with BDO valuations specialists to determine whether the 
revenue multiples used represented an appropriate benchmark.

–  We have looked at the accuracy of previous forecasts compared with 
actual performance and calculated the impact of sensitising key 
assumptions including the discount rate applied on the recoverable 
amount of the CGU.

–  We assessed the adequacy of disclosures in the financial statements 
regarding the impairment assessment performed by management 
against the requirements of the accounting standards.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

67

In order to gain appropriate audit coverage 
of the risks described above and of each 
individually significant reporting component, 
full scope audits of the five significant 
components were performed by the Group 
audit team. In respect of the two non-
significant components based in the US, 
which contribute 2% of Group net assets 
(30 June 2017: 4%), the Group audit team 
performed certain audit procedures over 
the financial information relevant to the 
consolidated financial statements. These 
procedures were performed to an appropriate 
level of materiality having regard to the 
level of Group materiality described above 
as well as aggregation risk. All significant 
components of the Group have conterminous 
year ends, with the exception of River and 
Mercantile Asset Management LLP, which 
has a year end of 31 March. A full scope audit 
was performed by the Group audit team for 
the year ended 31 March 2018 and additional 
audit procedures were performed to cover 
the three month period to 30 June 2018, 
as well as the correct allocation of financial 
information to the Group’s reporting period.

OTHER INFORMATION
The other information comprises the 
information included in the Annual Report, 
other than the financial statements and our 
auditors’ report thereon. The Directors are 
responsible for the other information. Our 
opinion on the financial statements does 
not cover the other information and, except 
to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in 
our report, we do not express any form of 
assurance conclusion thereon. In connection 
with our audit of the financial statements, our 
responsibility is to read the other information 
and, in doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent with 
the financial statements or our knowledge 
obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to 
be materially misstated. If we identify such 
material inconsistencies or apparent material 
misstatements, we are required to determine 
whether there is a material misstatement 
in the financial statements or a material 
misstatement of the other information. 
If, based on the work we have performed, 
we conclude that there is a material 
misstatement of the other information, 
we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

In this context, we also have nothing to 
report in regard to our responsibility to 
specifically address the following items 
in the other information and to report as 
uncorrected material misstatements of the 
other information where we conclude that 
those items meet the following conditions:

–  Fair, balanced and understandable set out 
on page 63 – the statement given by the 
Directors that they consider the Annual 
Report and financial statements taken as a 
whole is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary  
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy, 
is materially inconsistent with our 
knowledge obtained in the audit; or

–  Audit Committee reporting set out on 

page 47 – the section describing the work of 
the Audit Committee does not appropriately 
address matters communicated by us to the 
Audit Committee; or

–  Directors’ statement of compliance with the 
UK Corporate Governance Code set out on 
page 44 – the parts of the Directors’ 
statement required under the Listing Rules 
relating to the parent company’s compliance 
with the UK Corporate Governance Code 
containing provisions specified for review  
by the auditor in accordance with Listing 
Rule 9.8.10R(2) do not properly disclose a 
departure from a relevant provision of  
the UK Corporate Governance Code.

OPINIONS ON OTHER MATTERS 
PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 
2006
In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ 
remuneration report to be audited has 
been properly prepared in accordance 
with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken 
in the course of the audit:

–  the information given in the strategic report 
and the Directors’ report for the financial 
year for which the financial statements are 
prepared is consistent with the financial 
statements; and

–  the strategic report and the Directors’ 

report have been prepared in accordance 
with applicable legal requirements.

OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY
We apply the concept of materiality both in 
planning and performing our audit, and in 
evaluating the effect of misstatements. We 
consider materiality to be the magnitude by 
which misstatements, including omission, 
could influence the economic decisions of 
reasonable users that are taken on the basis of 
the financial statements. Misstatements below 
these levels will not necessarily be evaluated 
as immaterial as we also take into account 
of the nature of identified misstatements, 
and the particular circumstances of their 
occurrence, when evaluating their effect 
on the financial statements as a whole.

The materiality for the Group financial 
statements as a whole was set at £866,000 
(30 June 2017: £540,000). This was 
determined with reference to a benchmark 
of 5% of profit before tax. We used this 
benchmark as we consider this to be one of 
the principal considerations for members of 
the parent company in assessing the financial 
performance of the Group. The basis of 
materiality is consistent with the prior year.

Performance materiality was set at 
£650,000 (30 June 2017: £324,000), 
being 75 per cent (30 June 2017: 60%)
of the above materiality levels.

Materiality in respect of the audit of the parent 
company has been set at £650,000 (30 June 
2017: £410,000) using a benchmark of 75% 
of Group materiality (30 June 2017: 75% of 
Group materiality). We consider this measure 
to be the most appropriate measure for the 
basis of materiality as the parent company is 
a holding company with no separate trade.

Whilst materiality for the financial 
statements of a whole was £866,000, 
each component of the Group was 
audited to a lower level of materiality. 
Component materiality was £650,000.

We agreed with the Audit Committee 
that we would report to the Committee 
all individual audit differences in excess 
of £17,000 (30 June 2017: £11,000). We 
also agreed to report differences below 
this threshold that, in our view, warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds.

AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF OUR 
AUDIT
Our audit approach was developed by 
obtaining an understanding of the Group’s 
activities and the overall control environment. 
Based on this understanding we assessed 
those aspects of the Group’s transactions 
and balances which were most likely to 
give rise to a material misstatement.

USE OF OUR REPORT
This report is made solely to the parent 
company’s members, as a body, in accordance 
with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so 
that we might state to the parent company’s 
members those matters we are required 
to state to them in an auditor’s report and 
for no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the 
parent company and the parent company’s 
members as a body, for our audit work, for this 
report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Leigh Treacy 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)

For and on behalf of 

BDO LLP,  
Statutory Auditor 
London

5 October 2018

BDO LLP is a limited liability partnership 
registered in England and Wales (with 
registered number OC305127).

68 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF 
RIVER AND MERCANTILE GROUP PLC CONTINUED

AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE 
AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable 
assurance about whether the financial 
statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s 
report that includes our opinion. Reasonable 
assurance is a high level of assurance, but 
is not a guarantee that an audit conducted 
in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always 
detect a material misstatement when 
it exists. Misstatements can arise from 
fraud or error and are considered material 
if, individually or in the aggregate, they 
could reasonably be expected to influence 
the economic decisions of users taken on 
the basis of these financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities 
for the audit of the financial statements 
is located on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description 
forms part of our auditor’s report.

OTHER MATTERS WHICH WE ARE 
REQUIRED TO ADDRESS
Following the recommendation of the 
audit committee, we were appointed 
by the Board of Directors to audit the 
financial statements for the year ending 
30 June 2014 and subsequent financial 
periods. The period of total uninterrupted 
engagement is five years, covering the years 
ending 30 June 2014 to 30 June 2018.

The non-audit services prohibited by the 
FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided 
to the Group or the parent company and we 
remain independent of the Group and the 
parent company in conducting our audit.

Our audit opinion is consistent with the 
additional report to the Audit Committee.

MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED 
TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION
In the light of the knowledge and 
understanding of the Group and parent 
company and its environment obtained 
in the course of the audit, we have not 
identified material misstatements in the 
strategic report or the Directors’ report.

We have nothing to report in respect 
of the following matters in relation to 
which the Companies Act 2006 requires 
us to report to you if, in our opinion:

–  adequate accounting records have not been 
kept by the parent company, or returns 
adequate for our audit have not been 
received from branches not visited by us; or

–  the parent company financial statements 

and the part of the Directors’ remuneration 
report to be audited are not in agreement 
with the accounting records and returns; or

–  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration 

specified by law are not made; or

–  we have not received all the information and 
explanations we require for our audit; or

–  a corporate governance statement has not 
been prepared by the parent company.

RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS
As explained more fully in the Directors’ 
responsibilities statement set out on page 
64, the Directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the financial statements 
and for being satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view, and for such internal control 
as the Directors determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the 
Directors are responsible for assessing the 
Group’s and the parent company’s ability 
to continue as a going concern, disclosing, 
as applicable, matters related to going 
concern and using the going concern basis 
of accounting unless the Directors either 
intend to liquidate the Group or the parent 
company or to cease operations, or have 
no realistic alternative but to do so.

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

69

Revenue
Net management fees
Advisory fees
Performance fees

Total revenue

Administrative expenses
Depreciation
Amortisation

Total operating expenses

Remuneration and benefits
Fixed remuneration and benefits
Variable remuneration

Total remuneration and benefits
EPSP (credit)/costs

Total remuneration and benefits including EPSP

Total expenses

Gain on disposal of available-for-sale assets
Other gains and losses

Profit before interest and tax

Finance income
Finance expense

Profit before tax

Tax charge/(credit)
Current tax 
Deferred tax 

Profit for the year attributable to owners of the parent

Earnings per share:
Statutory basic (pence)
Statutory diluted (pence)

Note

3

5
8,21
8,9

6
7

18
10

12
12

13

14

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017 
£’000

53,963 
10,235 
10,575

74,773 

14,074
156
4,595

18,825

22,940
16,210

39,150
(123)

39,027

57,852

458
1,063

45,371
10,522
12,549

68,442

11,562
116
4,330

16,008

20,114
15,201

35,315
1,566

36,881

52,889

793
–

18,442

16,346

50
(40)

46
(3)

18,452

16,389

3,896
(586)

4,877
(1,844)

15,142

13,356

18.83
18.08

16.45
15.48

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Profit for the year
Items that may be subsequently reclassified to profit or loss:
Foreign currency translation adjustments
Change in value of available-for-sale investments
Tax on change in value of available-for-sale investments
Gain on disposal of available-for-sale investments
Tax on gain on disposal of available-for-sale investments

Total comprehensive income for the year attributable to owners of the parent

Note

18
13
18
13

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017 
£’000

15,142

13,356

21
472
(95)
(458)
92

66
445
(90)
(793)
159

15,174

13,143

The notes to the consolidated financial statements form part of and should be read in conjunction with these financial statements.

70

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Investment management balances
Available-for-sale investments
Fee receivables
Other receivables
Deferred tax asset
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets

Total assets

Liabilities
Investment management balances
Current tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Deferred tax liability

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Other reserves
Own shares held by EBT
Retained earnings

Note

16 
17
18
19
20
13
21
9

17

22
23
13

24

25
24

30 June
 2018 
£’000

30 June
 2017 
£’000

24,029 
13,116 
5,165 
7,856
19,696 
2,443 
601 
35,025 

30,759
62,138
12
5,619
14,898
3,421
263
37,353

107,931

154,463

13,147 
2,054
22,373
1,209
3,153

41,936

65,995

246 
14,688 
49,372
(4,981)
6,670

60,317
3,111
18,699
–
3,969

86,096

68,367

246
14,688
49,340
(4,766)
8,859

Equity attributable to owners of the parent

65,995

68,367

The notes to the consolidated financial statements form part of and should be read in conjunction with these financial statements.

The financial statements were approved by the Board on 5 October 2018.

Mike Falkner 
Chief Executive Officer 

Kevin Hayes
Chief Financial Officer

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

71

Cash flow from operating activities
Profit before interest and tax

Adjustments for:
Amortisation of intangible assets
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Share-based payment expense
Other gain and losses
Gain on disposal of available-for-sale investments

Operating cash flow before movement in working capital
Decrease/(increase) in operating assets
(Decrease)/increase in operating liabilities

Cash generated from operations
Tax paid

Net cash generated from operating activities

Cash flow from investing activities
Purchase of intangible assets
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Interest received
Investment in available-for-sale investments
Proceeds from disposal of available-for-sale investments

Net cash (used in)/generated from investing activities

Cash flow from financing activities
Interest paid
Dividends paid
Purchase of own shares 

Net cash used in financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017 
£’000

Note

18,442

16,346

4,595
156
2,364
(1,063)
(458)

24,036
41,988
(43,234)

22,790
(4,953)

4,330
116
2,039
–
(793)

22,038
(49,952)
54,533

26,619
(2,934)

17,837

23,685

(328)
(504)
23
(10,043)
5,362

(5,490)

(79)
(2)
15
(10)
5,793

5,717

9
21
7
10
18

9
21

18
18

12 
15
24

(1)
(17,456)
(1,665)

–
(9,345)
(3,483)

(19,122)

(12,828)

(6,775)

16,574

30,759
45

24,029

14,147
38

30,759

16

The notes to the consolidated financial statements form part of and should be read in conjunction with these financial statements.

 
72

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES  
IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Balance as at 30 June 2016

Comprehensive income for the year:
Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Deferred tax credit on available-for-sale investments

Total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners:
Dividends
Share-based payment expense
Deferred tax on share-based payment expense 
Purchase of own shares by EBT

Total transactions with owners

Balance as at 30 June 2017

Comprehensive income for the year:
Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Deferred tax credit on available-for-sale investments

Total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners:
Dividends
Share-based payment expense
Deferred tax on share-based payment expense 
Disposal of shares in respect of award vesting
Purchase of own shares by EBT

Total transactions with owners

Balance as at 30 June 2018

Share 
capital 
£’000

246

Share 
premium
 £’000

14,688

Other
 reserves 
£’000

49,553

Own shares 
held by EBT 
£’000

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

Total 
£’000

(1,283)

532

63,736

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
(123)
(90)

(213)

–
–
–
–

–

246

14,688

49,340

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
35
(3)

32

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
(3,483)

(3,483)

(4,766)

13,356
–
–

13,356

(9,345)
2,039
2,277
–

(5,029)

13,356
(123)
(90)

13,143

(9,345)
2,039
2,277
(3,483)

(8,512)

8,859

68,367

–
–
–

–

15,142
–
–

15,142
35
(3)

15,142

15,174

–
–
–
1,450
(1,665)

(17,456)
2,364
(789)
(1,450)
–

(17,456)
2,364
(789)
–
(1,665)

(215)

(17,331)

(17,546)

246

14,688

49,372

(4,981)

6,670

65,995

The notes to the consolidated financial statements form part of and should be read in conjunction with these financial statements.

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

73

1. BASIS OF PREPARATION
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, International 
Accounting Standards, International Financial Reporting Interpretation Committee interpretations, and with those parts of the 2006 Act applicable 
to groups reporting under IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and adopted by the European Union (IFRS) that are 
relevant to the Group’s operations and effective for accounting periods beginning on 1 July 2017. 

Going concern
The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group and Company have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future.

In reaching this conclusion the Directors have considered budgeted and projected results of the business including a 2019 budget and three year 
forecast for the Group with several scenarios, projected cash flow and regulatory capital requirements, and the risks that could impact on the 
Group’s liquidity and solvency over the next 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements. Additionally, the capital adequacy  
of the Group in base and stress scenarios is tested as part of the ICAAP and viability statement process.

Accordingly, the Group and Company financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis using the historical cost convention, except 
for the measurement at fair value of certain financial instruments that are held at fair value.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements include the Company and the entities it controls (its subsidiaries). Subsidiaries are considered to be 
controlled where the Group has exposure to variable returns from the subsidiary, the power to affect those variable returns and power over the 
subsidiary itself. Control is reassessed whenever facts and circumstances indicate that there may be a change in any of these elements of control. 

Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date that the Group gains control, and de-consolidated from the date that control is lost.

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the results of business combinations using the acquisition method. In the statement of financial 
position, the subsidiaries’ identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are initially recognised at their fair values at the acquisition date. 
The results of acquired operations are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income from the date on which control is obtained. 
The consolidated financial statements are based on the financial statements of the individual companies drawn up using the standard Group 
accounting policies. Accounting policies applied by individual subsidiaries have been revised where necessary to ensure consistency with Group 
policies for consolidation purposes. 

All transactions and balances between entities within the Group have been eliminated in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements.

The EBT is included in the consolidated financial statements of the Group. The trust purchases shares pursuant to the non-dilutive equity awards 
granted to employees. These purchases and the operating costs of the trust are funded by the Company. The trust is controlled by independent 
trustees and its assets are held separately from those of the Group.

The consolidated statement of financial position has been presented on the basis of the liquidity of assets and liabilities.

The Group’s relationship with fund entities
The Group entities act as the investment managers to funds and segregated managed accounts, and RAMAM is the Authorised Corporate Director 
(ACD) of River and Mercantile Funds ICVC (collectively ‘Investment Management Entities’ (IMEs)). 

Considering all significant aspects of the Group’s relationship with the IMEs, the Directors are of the opinion that although the Group manages the 
investment resources of the IMEs, the existence of: termination provisions in the IMAs which allow for the removal of the Group as the investment 
manager; the influence exercised by investors in the control of their IME and the arm’s length nature of the Group’s contracts with the IME; and 
independent Boards of Directors of the IME, the Group does not control the IME and therefore the assets, liabilities and net profit are not 
consolidated into the Group’s financial statements. 

Foreign currencies 
The majority of revenues, assets, liabilities and funding are denominated in UK Pounds sterling (GBP/£), and therefore the presentation currency  
of the Group is GBP. All entities within the Group have a functional currency of GBP, except for River and Mercantile LLC which is based in the US. 

Monetary items which are denominated in foreign currencies are translated at the rates prevailing at the reporting date. Non-monetary items are 
measured at the rates prevailing on the date of the transaction and are not subsequently re-translated.

The functional currency of River and Mercantile LLC is US Dollars and is translated into the presentational currency as follows:

–  assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate at the date of the respective statement of financial position;

–  income and expenses are translated at the daily exchange rate for the date on which they are incurred; and

–  all resulting exchange differences are recognised in other comprehensive income.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign entity and 
translated at the closing rate. Exchange differences arising are recognised in other comprehensive income.

74

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND SIGNIFICANT JUDGMENTS AND ESTIMATES
As detailed in note 1, these financial statements are prepared in accordance with IFRS. The significant accounting policies of the Group which 
impact these financial statements are:

–  Impairment of intangible assets, goodwill and investments recorded in previous acquisitions. This involves judgments including business growth 

and estimates including discount rates, which are described in note 9.

–  Recognition of management and performance fee revenues. This involves estimates of AUM/NUM positions for the purposes of accruing 

revenue, which are described in note 3.

–  Provisions, which are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that the Group will be 
required to settle that obligation. Determining whether provisions are required and at what level, requires both judgment and estimates. See 
note 23.

–  The accounting for share-based remuneration. This involves judgments relating to forfeiture rates and business outcomes and estimates of 

future share prices for National Insurance cost, which are described in note 7.

–  The accounting for the acquisition of the Emerging Markets Industrial Lifecycle (ILC) team (note 11). This involves judgments relating to the likely 

useful life of intangibles and estimates as to revenue and cost growth over time.

–  The accounting for UCITS V deferred remuneration, which involves estimates of forfeiture rates (note 6).

3. REVENUE
Net management fees
Net management fees represent the fees charged pursuant to an IMA with clients. They are reported net of rebates to clients and commissions paid 
to third parties, and are charged as a percentage of the client’s AUM or NUM. The fees are generally accrued on a daily basis and charged to the 
client either monthly or quarterly. During the year ended 30 June 2018, rebates and commissions totalling £3,176,000 (2017: £2,094,000) were paid 
in respect of Equity Solutions and DAA Fund management fees. 

Advisory fees
Advisory fees represent fees charged under Investment Advisory Agreements (IAA) and are typically charged on a fixed retainer fee basis or 
through a fee for the delivery of a defined project. Fees are accrued monthly and charged when the work has been completed.

Performance fees
Performance fees are fees paid under the IMAs for generating excess investment performance either on an absolute basis subject to a high water 
mark, or relative to a benchmark. Performance fees are calculated as a percentage of the investment performance generated and may be subject to 
deferral and continued performance objectives in future periods. Performance fees are recognised in income when the quantum of the fee can be 
estimated reliably and it is probable that the fee will be realised. This occurs once the end of the performance period has been reached. The client is 
invoiced for the performance fee at the end of the performance period which is generally annually, either on the anniversary of their IMA or on a 
calendar year basis.

4. DIVISIONAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL REPORTING
The business operates through four divisions, however, these are not considered to be segments for the purposes of IFRS 8 on the basis that 
resource allocation decisions are not made on the basis of segmental reporting and results are not analysed to a profit level. Despite this, the 
Directors feel that it is useful to the understanding of the results of operations to include certain information.

The net revenue for the year ended 30 June 2018 and 30 June 2017 together with the year-end AUM and NUM, reflect the activities of the 
respective divisions.

Net management and advisory fees
Fiduciary Management division
Derivative Solutions division
Equity Solutions division
Advisory division

Total 

Year ended 30 June 2018

Year ended 30 June 2017

Net 
revenue 
£’000

Fee earning 
AUM/NUM 
£’m

Net 
revenue 
£’000

Fee earning 
AUM/NUM 
£’m

18,400
11,777
23,786
10,235

64,198

10,642
18,622
4,579
N/A

33,843

17,677
10,883
16,811
10,522

55,893

10,528
16,888
3,633
N/A

31,049

In addition, performance fees of £8.2m (2017: £6.6m) were earned by the Fiduciary Management division and £2.4m (2017: £6.0m) by the Equity 
Solutions division.

No single client accounts for more than 10% of the revenue of the Group (2017: none). 

On a geographic basis the majority of the revenues are earned in the UK. The Group has an Advisory, Derivatives, Fiduciary Management and 
Equity Solutions business in the US and net revenue earned in the US for the year ended 30 June 2018 was £5.7m (2017: £4.8m). The AUM/NUM of 
the US business was £903m (2017: £630m).

Non-current assets held by the US business include £1.5m (2017: £1.5m) of goodwill.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

75

5. ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES

Marketing
Travel and entertainment
Office facilities
Technology and communications
Professional fees
Governance expenses
Fund administration
Other staff costs
Insurance
Irrecoverable VAT
Other costs

Total administrative expenses (excluding IT migration costs)
IT migration costs

Total administrative expenses

Administrative expenses include the remuneration of the external auditor for the following services:

Audit of the Company’s annual accounts
Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries
Audit related assurance services
Tax compliance services

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017 
£’000

892 
662 
2,502 
5,598 
1,400
538
902 
295
335
300
650 

14,074
–

14,074

839
498
2,192
3,720
1,027
413
481
412
234
226
378

10,420
1,142

11,562

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017 
£’000

99
89
49
–

237

95
80
55
19

249

The tax compliance remuneration relates to services provided in respect of the period to 30 June 2016. Tax compliance services are no longer 
provided by the Group’s auditor.

6. REMUNERATION AND BENEFITS
Fixed remuneration represents contractual base salaries, RAMAM LLP member drawings and employee benefits. The Group operates a defined 
contribution plan under which the Group pays contributions to a third party.

Variable remuneration relates to discretionary bonuses, variable profit share paid to the members of RAMAM LLP and associated payroll taxes. 

Variable remuneration also includes a charge of £2,320,000 (2017: £1,515,000) relating to the amortisation of the Group’s non-dilutive share awards 
and £465,000 (2017: £409,000) of associated social security costs. 

The average number of employees (including Directors) employed was:
Advisory division
Fiduciary Management division
Derivative Solutions division
Equity Solutions division
Distribution
Corporate

Total average headcount

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
Number

Year ended 
30 June
 2017 
Number

71
56
24
23
12
31

68
55
24
20
12
29

217

208

76

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

6. REMUNERATION AND BENEFITS continued

The aggregate remuneration of employees (including Directors) comprised:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs (defined contribution)
Share-based payment expense

Total remuneration and benefits (excluding EPSP)

Fixed remuneration
Variable remuneration

EPSP costs:
Share-based payment expense
Social security costs

Total EPSP costs

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
 £’000

Note

32,601
3,811
826
1,912

39,150

22,940
16,210

39,150

452
(575)

(123)

29,788
3,326
686
1,515

35,315

20,114
15,201

35,315

452
1,114

1,566

7

7
7

Directors’ remuneration
The aggregate remuneration and fees payable to Executive and Non-Executive Directors for the year ended 30 June 2018 was £4,294,020 
(2017: £3,568,000). Fees payable for the year ended 30 June 2018 to Directors of PSG totalled £43,000 (2017: £43,000).

The remuneration of the Executive Directors (which includes the highest paid Director) is included in the Remuneration Committee report which 
starts on page 50.

Key management remuneration
Key management includes the Executive and Non-Executive Directors, and Executive Committee members. The remuneration paid or payable to 
key management for employee services is shown below:

Short-term employee benefits
Long-term employee benefits
Post-employment benefits
Share-based payment expense

Year ended 
30 June 
2018 
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
 £’000

8,601
771
111
2,112

9,069
–
111
1,586

11,595

10,766

Details of share awards granted to Executive Directors for future performance periods are included in the Remuneration Committee report.

7. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
Where share options are awarded to employees, the fair value of the options at the date of grant is charged to the consolidated income statement 
over the vesting period. Non-market vesting conditions are taken into account by adjusting the number of equity instruments expected to vest at 
each year end date so that, ultimately, the cumulative amount recognised over the vesting period is based on the number of options that eventually 
vest. Market vesting conditions are factored into the fair value of the options granted. As long as all other vesting conditions are satisfied, a charge 
is made irrespective of whether the market vesting conditions are satisfied. The cumulative expense is not adjusted for failure to achieve a market 
vesting condition.

Where the terms and conditions of options are modified before they vest, the change in the fair value of the options, measured immediately before 
and after the modifications, is recognised in the consolidated income statement over the remaining vesting period.

Executive Performance Share Plan
Prior to Group’s admission to the London Stock Exchange (admission) on 26 June 2014, the Board of Directors established the Executive 
Performance Share Plan (EPSP) to grant the Executive Directors performance share awards. At the date of admission two classes of performance 
share awards were made: Performance Condition A awards and Performance Condition B awards. The Company granted 4,844,000 performance 
shares under Performance Condition A awards and 2,463,000 performance shares under Performance Condition B awards. The exercise price for 
the EPSP share awards is £0.003. 

The number of Performance Condition A awards eligible for vesting was conditional upon achieving a total shareholder return (TSR) of at least 12% 
compounded over a four-year performance period ending in June 2018. Vesting started at 12% compound annual TSR and 100% vested at 24% 
compound annual TSR over the four-year period. Vesting was pro-rated on a straight-line basis between 12% and 24%. 

The number of Performance Condition B awards eligible for vesting was conditional on achieving a TSR of at least 25% compounded over a 
four-year performance period ending June 2018. Vesting started at 25% compound annual TSR and 100% vested at 30% compound annual TSR 
over the four-year period. Vesting was pro-rated on a straight-line basis between 25% and 30%. 

The compound annual TSR for the performance period was 18.9%, leading to 57% of the Performance Condition A awards and none of the 
Performance Condition B awards being eligible for vesting following a one-year holding period during which the participant must continue in 
employment by the Group or, if employment ceases, be classified as a good leaver at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. The eligible 
awards will receive dividends on a reinvestment basis during the holding period.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

77

7. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS continued
As a result of the completion of the performance period, during the year ended 30 June 2018, 4,546,000 award shares were forfeited (2017: none). 
No shares were granted, exercised, expired or vested under either the A or B awards during the year (2017: none). 

The fair value of the Performance shares was determined by an independent valuation undertaken by EY on behalf of the Remuneration 
Committee. This fair value was based on a Monte Carlo simulation of possible outcomes based on the returns and volatility characteristics of 
comparable publicly listed investment management businesses in the FTSE. 

The key assumptions used in the valuation were: a mean expected TSR growth rate in line with the risk free rate (1.72%); a TSR volatility derived 
from the TSR volatilities of listed comparable companies of 30%; and a dividend yield of 4.5%. 

The fair value of the Performance Condition A awards is 38 pence per share and the fair value of the Performance Condition B awards is 17 pence 
per share. The total fair value of Performance Condition A and B awards is £1.8m and £0.4m respectively. The fair value is amortised into EPSP 
costs over the vesting period and a charge of £452,000 was recognised for the year ended 30 June 2018 (2017: £452,000), which is treated as a 
non-cash adjusting item. The weighted average contractual remaining life of the A and B awards as at 30 June 2018 is one year.

The Directors expect that any shares that vest will be subject to applicable employer’s National Insurance at the date of vesting. An accrual for this 
cost has been calculated based on the current rate of National Insurance, the number of the shares that the Directors expect to vest and the share 
price at the reporting date. The movement in the accrual in the year ended 30 June 2018 was a credit of £575,000 (2017: charge of £1,114,000) and 
is included in EPSP costs. 

Performance Share Plan
The Group’s Performance Share Plan and Deferred Equity Plan allow for the grant of: nil cost options, contingent share awards or forfeitable  
share awards. 

The fair value of the awards has been estimated using a combination of Monte Carlo simulation and Black-Scholes modelling. 

For the purposes of these financial statements the awards made in respect of 2018 have been assessed using the share price as at 30 June 2018, 
being £2.68.

The key features of the awards are: 

Financial year of award

Grant date award value £’000
Scheme 1 – Employees
Scheme 2 – Employees
Scheme 3 – Employees
Scheme 4 – Employees
Scheme 5 – Employees 
Scheme 6 – Executive Directors

Number of shares granted ’000
Scheme 1 – Employees
Scheme 2 – Employees
Scheme 3 – Employees
Scheme 4 – Employees
Scheme 5 – Employees 
Scheme 6 – Executive Directors

Maximum term at grant date
Scheme 1 – Employees
Scheme 2 – Employees
Scheme 3 – Employees
Scheme 4 – Employees
Scheme 5 – Employees 
Scheme 6 – Executive Directors

Vesting conditions (see key below)
Scheme 1 – Employees
Scheme 2 – Employees
Scheme 3 – Employees
Scheme 4 – Employees
Scheme 5 – Employees 
Scheme 6 – Executive Directors

1. Remain employed throughout vesting period, subject to malus and good leaver provisions.

2. Achievement of specified total shareholder return target within a range.

3. Straight-line between minimum and maximum divisional AUM/NUM and revenue targets.

4. Achievement of specified revenue targets within a range.

5. Achievement of specified adjusted underlying EPS targets and personal objectives.

2015

2016

2017

2018

701
144
–
225
–
–

303
64
–
97
–
–

4 years
4 years
n/a
4 years
n/a
n/a

1,971
100
407
–
–
585

892
45
184
–
–
265

5 years
4 years
4 years
n/a
n/a
5 years

713
–
466
–
–
950

229
–
150
–
–
304

4 years
n/a
4 years
n/a
n/a
4 years

94
–
1,622
612
155
3,586

35
–
541
196
58
1,338

4 years
n/a
4 years
3 years
4 years
4 years

1, 2 and 3 
1 and 2 
n/a
1 and 4 
n/a
n/a

1, 2 and 3 
1 and 2 
1 
n/a
n/a
1 and 2 

1, 2 and 3 
n/a
1 
n/a
n/a
1 and 2 

1, 2 and 3 
n/a
1 
1 and 4 
none
1 and 5

78

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

7. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS continued
The following table sets out the movement in awards recognised in the income statement during the year and the key inputs into the fair values  
of awards:

’000

Grant date award value £’000
Grant date share price £
Number of shares outstanding at 30 June 2016 
Number of shares granted during the year 
Number of shares forfeited during the year 
Exercised during the year 
Number of shares outstanding at 30 June 2017 
Number of shares granted during the year 
Number of shares forfeited during the year 
Exercised during the year 

Number of shares outstanding at 30 June 2018 

Fair value assumptions:
Exercise price

Risk free rate

Share price volatility
Dividend yield
Number of shares expected to vest ’000

2015

1,070
2.31
464
–
–
–
464
–
(222)
(82)

160

2016

3,063
2.21
1,386

(48)
–
1,338
–
–
(500)

838

Financial year of award

2017

2,130
3.12
–
683
–
–
683
–
–
–

683

2018

668
3.14 est.
–

–
–
–
213
–
–

213

2018

1,133
3.12
–
–
–
–
–
363
–

363

£Nil
0.94%

26.08%
5%
160

£Nil
0.94% or 
1.00%
27.40%
5%
423

£Nil
1.00%

27.90%
5%
447

£Nil
1.00%

28.20%
5%
205

£Nil
1.00%

28.20%
5%
336

2018

4,268
2.68 est.
–

–
–
–
1,592
–
–

1,592

£Nil
1.00%

28.80%
5%
1,556

The volatility for awards granted in the year has been calculated based upon the annualised daily return on the Group’s share price from IPO to 
year-end. All awards exercise at the end of the vesting period subject to the approval of the Remuneration Committee. As at the reporting date 
311,000 of the awards were exercisable (2017: 556,000). 

8. DEPRECIATION AND AMORTISATION
Depreciation charges primarily relate to IT and communications equipment, and leasehold improvements. The property, plant and equipment,  
and the depreciation accounting policies are described in note 21. 

The amortisation charge primarily relates to the IMAs recorded in the acquisition of RAMAM and the ILC team as described in notes 9 and 11.  
The RAMAM and ILC team IMA intangibles are amortised over their expected useful life of between five and ten years based on an analysis of the 
respective client channels. The amortisation is not deductible for tax purposes. At the date of the acquisition a deferred tax liability was recognised 
and is being charged to tax in line with the amortisation of the related RAMAM IMAs. At the date of the acquisition no deferred tax liability was 
recognised in respect of the ILC team IMAs as the US business has brought-forward tax losses.

9. INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Business combinations and goodwill
All business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. The cost of a business combination is the aggregate of the fair values,  
at the date of exchange, of assets given, liabilities incurred or assumed and equity instruments issued by the acquirer. The fair value of a business 
combination is calculated at the acquisition date by recognising the acquired entity’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities that 
satisfy the recognition criteria, at their fair values at that date. The acquisition date is the date on which the acquirer effectively obtains control of 
the acquired entity. The cost of a business combination in excess of fair value of net identifiable assets or liabilities acquired, including intangible 
assets identified, is recognised as goodwill. Any costs incurred in relation to a business combination are expensed as incurred.

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and represents the excess of the consideration transferred over the Group’s interest in the fair 
value of the net identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquiree.

Goodwill is not amortised but is reviewed for impairment annually, or more frequently when there is an indication of impairment. For the purpose 
of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each of the Group’s cash generating units (CGUs) expected to 
benefit from the synergies of the combination. Each CGU to which the goodwill is allocated represents the lowest level within the entity at which 
the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes. If the recoverable amount of the CGU is less than the carrying amount of the unit, the 
impairment loss is allocated first to reduce the carrying value of any goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other assets of the unit pro-rata 
on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the unit. An impairment loss recognised is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Identifiable intangible assets
IMAs and customer relationships acquired in a business combination are recognised separately from goodwill at their fair value at the acquisition 
date. Customer relationships have an estimated useful life of 20 years and IMAs have estimated useful lives of five to ten years. The identified 
intangible assets are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation calculated on a straight-line basis. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

79

9. INTANGIBLE ASSETS continued
Impairment of intangible assets, excluding goodwill
At each statement of financial position date or whenever there is an indication that the asset may be impaired, the Group reviews the carrying 
amounts of its intangible assets to determine whether there is any indication that those assets have suffered an impairment loss. If any such 
indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order to determine the extent of the impairment loss (if any). Where the asset 
does not generate cash flows that are independent from other assets, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the CGU to which the asset 
belongs. The recoverable amount is the higher of the fair value less costs to sell, and the value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated future 
cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money 
and the risks specific to the asset for which the estimates of future cash flows have not been adjusted.

If the recoverable amount of an asset (or CGU) is estimated to be less than its carrying amount, an impairment loss is recognised as an expense 
immediately. For assets other than goodwill, where conditions giving rise to impairment subsequently reverse, the effect of the impairment charge 
is also reversed as a credit to the income statement, net of any depreciation or amortisation that would have been charged since the impairment.

Cost:
At 1 July 2016
Additions
Exchange difference

At 30 June 2017
Additions
Exchange difference

At 30 June 2018

Accumulated amortisation and impairment:
At 1 July 2016
Amortisation charge
Exchange difference

At 30 June 2017
Amortisation charge
Exchange difference

At 30 June 2018

Net book value:
At 30 June 2017

At 30 June 2018

Goodwill
£’000

Customer lists 
and IMAs
£’000

Software
£’000

Total
£’000

15,230
–
101

15,331
328
(64)

36,510
–
–

36,510
1,969
12

15,595

38,491

395
–
–

395
38
(15)

418

9,793
4,330
49

14,172
4,520
(2)

18,690

14,936

15,177

22,338

19,801

–
79
–

79
–
5

84

–
–
–

–
37
–

37

79

47

51,740
79
101

51,920
2,297
(47)

54,170

10,188
4,330
49

14,567
4,595
(17)

19,145

37,353

35,025

There were £1,969,000 of IMA additions as a result of the ILC team acquisition in the year ended 30 June 2018 (2017: £Nil) as discussed in note 11. 

Impairment review
Goodwill includes £13.2m (2017: £13.2m) in respect of RAMAM and £1.5m (2017: £1.5m) in respect of Cassidy Retirement Group Inc. (Cassidy).

The Directors estimated the recoverable amount of the RAMAM goodwill based upon the value in use of the business. The value in use was 
measured using internal budgets and forecasts to generate a five-year view. The key assumptions used were: a 12% revenue growth rate for the 
first five years; no growth after this point; and a pre-tax discount rate of 12%. Estimates were made concerning remuneration and administrative 
costs, based upon current levels and expected changes.

Sensitivity analysis was performed on the key inputs of the valuation, being the growth and discount rates and future cash flows. A growth rate of 
less than -8% or a discount rate of greater than 40% was required to indicate impairment.

The Directors estimated the recoverable amount of the Cassidy goodwill using a net realisable value. This value was measured using the revenues 
of the CGU and third-party data concerning comparable revenue multiples paid for recent acquisitions of similar businesses.

The key assumptions included in the estimate were: the costs of disposal; and the assumption that the multiples observed in other businesses 
would be comparable. Sensitivity analysis was performed on the valuation. A reduction in the revenue multiple of greater than 50% would be 
required to indicate impairment. 

80 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

10. OTHER GAINS AND LOSSES

Gain on bargain purchase (note 11)
Loss on disposal of fixed assets
Gain on disposal of subsidiary

Total other gains and losses

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

1,043
(8)
28

1,063

–
–
–

–

The gain on disposal of subsidiary arose on the closure of River and Mercantile Asset Management LLC, which was previously dormant.

11. GAIN ON BARGAIN PURCHASE
Following the on-boarding of the ILC team, on 1 December 2017 the Group became the investment manager of the ILC funds. The contractual 
agreements entered into between the parties constitute a business combination under IFRS 3.

The consideration payable to the seller is based on the contractually agreed amounts payable, including a future net revenue share arrangement 
over five years and seven months from 1 December 2017 calculated solely on a single ILC fund.

This contingent consideration is measured at fair value at the acquisition date. The contingent consideration balance is accounted for within ‘trade 
and other payables’ in the consolidated statement of financial position.

Based on a discount rate of 12% and an assumed AUM growth of 10% per annum, the fair value of the contingent consideration payable is 
£819,000. In addition, an upfront payment of £107,000 forms part of the acquisition costs together with the contingent consideration.

Fair value of contingent consideration on acquisition
Upfront consideration payable

Total consideration
Fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed:
Intangible assets – investment management agreements

Total assets and liabilities

Negative goodwill from bargain purchase

Year ended 
30 June
 2018
 £’000

819
107

926

1,969

1,969

(1,043)

The business combination results in a bargain purchase transaction as a result of the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed exceeding 
the total of the fair value of consideration payable. The Group has recognised a gain in ‘other gains and losses’ in the consolidated income 
statement for the year ended 30 June 2018.

Since acquisition the ILC team generated revenue of £902,000 for the year ended 30 June 2018, which was recognised in net management fees in 
the consolidated income statement. As the ILC team has been incorporated within River and Mercantile LLC, profit is not separately measured.

The fair value of contingent consideration, intangible assets and negative goodwill has reduced from the estimated values presented in the 
December 2017 interim financial statements as a result of the finalisation of contract terms including investment management agreements. 

12. FINANCE INCOME AND EXPENSE
Finance income and expense are recognised in the period to which they relate on an accruals basis.

Finance income comprises £23,000 of bank interest (2017: £14,000), £23,000 of interest earned from a loan to Palisades (2017: £22,000), £4,000  
of foreign exchange gain (2017: £8,000) and other finance income of £Nil (2017: £2,000).

Finance expense comprises £37,000 of fair value of contingent consideration loss (2017: £Nil) and £3,000 of other finance costs (2017: £3,000). 

13. CURRENT AND DEFERRED TAX 
The tax charge consists of current tax and deferred tax. Current tax represents the estimated tax payable on the taxable profits for the period. 
Taxable profit differs from profit before tax reported in the consolidated income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that  
are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. Deferred tax is recognised on temporary 
differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities, and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements, and is 
measured using the substantively enacted rates expected to apply when the asset or liability will be realised or settled.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not offset unless the Group has legal right to offset which it intends to apply. Deferred tax assets are 
recognised only to the extent that the Directors consider it probable that they will be recovered.

Deferred tax is recognised in the income statement, except that a charge attributable to an item of income or expense recognised as other 
comprehensive income or to an item recognised directly in equity is also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity. 

The most significant deferred tax items are the deferred tax liability established against the IMA intangible asset arising from the acquisition of 
RAMAM and the deferred tax asset recognised in respect of the EPSP share-based payment expense. The amortisation of the IMA intangible asset 
is not tax deductible for corporate tax purposes, therefore, the deferred tax liability is released into the consolidated income statement to match 
the amortisation of the IMA intangible. At each reporting date the Group estimates the corporation tax deduction that might be available on the 
vesting of EPSP shares and the corresponding adjustment to deferred tax is recognised in the income statement and equity. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

81

13. CURRENT AND DEFERRED TAX continued

Current tax:
Current tax on profits for the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total current tax
Deferred tax – origination and reversal of timing differences

Total tax charge

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

4,377
(481)

3,896
(586)

3,310

4,874
3

4,877
(1,844)

3,033

The total tax charge assessed for the year is lower (2017: lower) than the average standard rate of corporation tax in the UK. The differences are 
explained below:

Profit before tax
Profit before tax multiplied by the average rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% (2017: 19.75%)

Effects of:
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes
Deferred tax on amortisation of RAMAM IMAs
Income not subject to tax
Adjustment in respect of prior years
Other timing differences

The analysis of deferred tax assets and liabilities is as follows: 

Deferred tax assets
At beginning of year
(Charge)/credit to the income statement:
– accelerated capital allowances
– deductible temporary differences
– share-based payment expense
Credit/(debit) to equity – share-based payment expense

Deferred tax liabilities
At beginning of year
Credit to the income statement:
– amortisation of intangibles
– adjustment to deferred tax on intangibles due to changes in tax rates
Credit/(debit) to equity:
– movement on fair value of available-for-sale investments
– recycling of deferred tax on disposal of available-for-sale investments

At end of year

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

18,452
3,506

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

16,389
3,236

537
(851)
(191)
(285)
594

3,310

1,638
(1,306)
–
3
(538)

3,033

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

3,421

609

–
–
(189)
(789)

2,443

12
(25)
548
2,277

3,421

3,969

5,347

(851)
–

35
–

(849)
(460)

90
(159)

3,153

3,969

14. EARNINGS PER SHARE
The basic and diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity holders of the Company by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares of the Company in issue during the year.

To the extent that any of the EPSP awards (note 7) vest they will have a dilutive effect on the equity holders of the Company. The potential dilution 
effect of the EPSP awards is considered in the calculation of diluted earnings per share. 

The dilutive effect of the EPSP awards is measured based on the share price and dividends received by shareholders from the date of grant until the 
reporting date and is compared against the respective performance criteria of the performance shares to determine if the shares are dilutive as of 
the reporting date. No consideration is given to future performance.

Following the end of the performance period 57% (2017: 100%) of the EPSP Performance Condition A shares and none (2017: 21%) of the EPSP 
Performance Condition B shares have met the vesting criteria. As a result, 2,644,000 shares were dilutive (2017: 4,933,000). There were no share 
awards that were anti-dilutive in the year but which may be dilutive in future periods (2017: none).

 
 
82

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

14. EARNINGS PER SHARE continued

Profit attributable to owners of the parent (£’000)
Weighted average number of shares in issue (’000)
Weighted average number of diluted shares (’000)

Earnings per share:
Earnings per share
Basic (pence)
Diluted (pence)

Reconciliation between weighted average number of shares in issue:

Weighted average number of shares in issue – basic
Dilutive effect of shares granted under save-as-you-earn
Dilutive effect of shares granted under EPSP 

Weighted average number of shares in issue – diluted

Year ended 
30 June 
2018

Year ended
 30 June
 2017

15,142
80,410
83,740

13,356
81,149
86,288

18.83
18.08

16.45
15.48

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
’000

80,410
686
2,644

83,740

81,149
206
4,933

86,288

The weighted average number of shares in issue has reduced as a result of purchases of own shares by the EBT (note 24). At 30 June 2018, the EBT 
held 1,806,000 shares (2017: 1,884,000). The weighted average number held by the EBT during the year was 1,685,000 (2017: 899,000).

Adjusted profit
Adjusted profit comprises adjusted underlying profit and performance fee profit.

Adjusted underlying profit represents net management and advisory fees less associated remuneration, administrative expenses (excluding IT 
migration costs), depreciation, amortisation of software, and finance income and expense. 

Performance fee profit represents performance fees, less the associated remuneration costs plus the gain on disposal of available-for-sale assets.

Adjusted underlying profit
Net management and advisory fees
Administrative expenses – excluding IT migration costs
Underlying remuneration at 53%/52%
Amortisation of software
Depreciation
Net finance income/(expense)

Adjusted underlying profit before tax
Taxes

Adjusted underlying profit after tax

Adjusted underlying pre-tax margin

Performance fee profit
Performance fees
Less remuneration at 50%
Gain on disposal of available-for-sale assets

Performance fee profit before tax
Taxes

Performance fee profit after tax

Adjusted profit before tax
Adjusted profit after tax

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

64,198
(14,074)
(33,862)
(37)
(156)
10

16,079
(3,165)

55,893
(10,420)
(29,040)
–
(116)
43

16,360
(3,443)

12,914

12,917

25%

29%

10,575
(5,288)
458

5,745
(1,092)

12,549
(6,275)
793

7,067
(1,395)

4,653

5,672

21,824
17,567

23,427
18,589

 
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financials

83

14. EARNINGS PER SHARE continued
Reconciliation to statutory profit

Profit before tax
Adjustments:
Amortisation of acquired intangible assets and IMAs
IT migration costs
Other gains and losses
EPSP (credit)/costs

Adjusted profit before tax

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

18,452

16,389

4,558
–
(1,063)
(123)

4,330
1,142
–
1,566

21,824

23,427

IT migration costs are the non-recurring costs of transitioning the Group’s IT infrastructure from PSG and represent the final part of the separation 
from Punter Southall Group (PSG) under the Transitional Services Agreement (TSA).

Adjusted earnings per share

Adjusted profit after tax (£’000)
Weighted average shares (’000)
Weighted average diluted shares (’000)
Adjusted EPS:
Basic (pence)
Diluted (pence)
Adjusted underlying EPS:
Basic (pence)
Diluted (pence)

Year ended 
30 June 
2018

Year ended 
30 June 
2017

17,567
80,410
83,740

21.85
20.98

16.06
15.42

18,589
81,149
86,288

22.90
21.54

15.92
14.97

15. DIVIDENDS
The Group recognises dividends when an irrevocable commitment to pay them is incurred. In the case of interim dividends, this is generally the 
payment date. In the case of final dividends, this is the date upon which the dividend is approved by shareholders.

During the year, the following dividends were paid: 

2016 second interim 
2016 final 
2017 first interim 
2017 second interim
2017 final
2018 first interim

Ordinary 
(pence)

Special
 (pence)

Total 
(pence)

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

3.3
2.5
4.2
5.3
3.2
5.4

0.1
n/a
1.4
2.8
2.8
2.2

3.4
2.5
5.6
8.1
6.0
7.6

–
–
–
6,526
4,835
6,095

17,456

2,771
2,034
4,540
–
–
–

9,345

16.CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and demand deposits. At year end all cash balances were held by banks with credit ratings as 
detailed below.

Bank

Barclays Bank 
Lloyds Bank 
First Republic Bank 

Total cash and cash equivalents

£’000

Credit rating

Rating body

16,119 A2/Stable
Aa3
A1

7,583
327

Moody’s
Moody’s
Moody’s

24,029

84 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

17. INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT BALANCES

Investment management receivables
Investment management payables

30 June 
2018
£’000

13,116
13,147

30 June
 2017
£’000

62,138
60,317

As ACD of River and Mercantile Funds ICVC (the Fund) the Group is required to settle transactions between investors and the depositary of the 
Fund. The Group is exposed to the short-term liquidity requirements to settle with the depositary of the Fund before receiving payments from the 
investor. The credit risk associated with the investment management balances is discussed in note 28.

The investment management balances are recorded as loans and receivables and financial liabilities held at amortised cost. They are initially 
recognised based upon the values given by the administrator of the ICVC of the contractually agreed subscription or redemption values and are 
subsequently recognised at amortised cost. Due to their short-term nature (typically less than a week), amortised cost closely approximates fair 
value. If any investment management receivable was to remain unpaid significantly past its term, the Directors would consider a provision for 
impairment. No provisions were made as at 30 June 2018 (2017: £Nil).

18. AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE INVESTMENTS
During the year, the Group invested £5m of seed capital in the River and Mercantile Global Macro Fund (the Global Macro Fund) GBP share class. 
Subsequently, the investment in the GBP share class was partially redeemed and reinvested into the USD share classes resulting in a realised gain  
of £458,000. The investments are recognised as an available-for-sale financial asset with unrealised fair value movements recognised in other 
comprehensive income. The fair value of the Group’s investment in the Global Macro Fund was derived from the fair value of the underlying 
investments, some of which are not traded in an active market and, therefore, the investment is classified as Level 2 under IFRS 13 Fair Value 
Measurement. The Global Macro Fund is an unlisted equity vehicle based in Ireland.

The movement in the carrying value of the available-for-sale investment is analysed below:

At 1 July 2016
Additions
Movement in fair value
Disposals

At 30 June 2017
Additions
Movement in fair value
Disposals

At 30 June 2018

£’000

5,350
10
445
(5,793)

12
10,043
472
(5,362) 

5,165

19. FEE RECEIVABLES
Fee receivables are recorded initially at the invoiced value, which is the estimated fair value of the receivables and are subsequently held at 
amortised cost. The Group’s policy on financial instruments can be found in note 28. 

The collectability of the fee receivables is reviewed periodically and if there is evidence to indicate that an amount may not be collectable a specific 
provision is established against the receivable. At 30 June 2018, a provision of £38,000 (2017: £55,000) has been established against potentially 
irrecoverable receivable balances and the total balance is reported in the consolidated statement of financial position net of this provision. On 
confirmation that the fee receivables will not be collectable, the gross carrying value of the asset is written off against the associated provision.

The ageing of fee receivables is shown below:

Neither past due nor impaired
Past due but not impaired:
– less than three months
– more than three months
Impaired:
– more than three months
– provision for impairment

Total fee receivables

30 June
 2018
£’000

6,695

931
230

38
(38)

30 June
 2017
£’000

4,254

995
370

55
(55)

7,856

5,619

The average credit period on fee receivables is 37 days (2017: 27 days). The Directors believe that the carrying value of fee receivables, net of 
impairment, represents their fair value due to their short-term nature and is the maximum credit risk value. The Directors are satisfied with the 
credit quality of counterparties.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

85

20. OTHER RECEIVABLES

Accrued income
Prepayments
Other assets

30 June 
2018
£’000

13,620
1,292
4,784

19,696

30 June 
2017 
£’000

13,088
1,080
730

14,898

Accrued income includes management, advisory and performance fees that have been recognised in the consolidated income statement in line 
with the Group’s accounting policies on revenue recognition, but have not yet been invoiced to clients. Clients are generally invoiced in arrears on  
a quarterly basis. 

The Group’s policy on financial instruments can be found in note 28. 

21. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Property, plant and equipment is carried at historical cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation charges the cost of the assets to the 
consolidated income statement over their expected useful lives. Office equipment includes computer equipment which is depreciated over three 
years, and fixtures, fittings and equipment which is depreciated over seven years. Leasehold improvements are amortised over the remaining term 
of the leases. The depreciation period and method is reviewed annually. 

Cost:
At 1 July 2016
Additions

At 30 June 2017
Additions
Disposals
Re-classification

At 30 June 2018

Accumulated depreciation:
At 1 July 2016
Depreciation charge

At 30 June 2017
Disposals
Re-classification
Depreciation charge

At 30 June 2018

Net book value:
At 30 June 2017

At 30 June 2018

22. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Trade payables
VAT payable
Remuneration accruals
Other accruals and payables
Deferred income

The Group’s policy on financial instruments can be found in note 28. 

Office 
equipment
£’000

Leasehold 
improvements
£’000

688
2

690
197
(330)
16

573

576
73

649
(330)
9
37

365

41

208

367
–

367
307
(243)
(16)

415

102
43

145
(233)
(9)
119

22

222

393

Total
£’000

1,055
2

1,057
504
(573)
–

988

678
116

794
(563)
–
156

387

263

601

30 June 
2018
£’000

978
861
13,353
7,145
36

22,373

30 June 
2017
£’000

1,042
697
14,210
2,716
34

18,699

86 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

23. PROVISIONS
FCA competition matter
On 29 November 2017, the FCA issued a statement of objection to four asset managers including RAMAM, alleging a breach of competition law 
concerning the disclosure and/or acceptance of information about the pricing for shares in relation to one IPO and one placing. This was a 
provisional finding and may not necessarily lead to an infringement decision. 

The matter does not affect any clients of RAMAM or the NAV of any fund or segregated mandate. 

RAMAM and the Group have cooperated fully with the matter and are pursuing a robust defence. In the prior year, the matter was noted as a 
contingent liability. Following receipt of guidance from the FCA on the likely quantum of penalty should one be imposed, the Directors have 
recognised a provision of £109,000 in respect of this matter. 

Operational error
An operational error has been identified relating to the treatment of transaction taxes in a single segregated mandate. The matter is ongoing 
however, following investigation, the Directors have deemed it prudent to recognise a provision of £1,100,000 with a corresponding insurance 
recovery asset of £1,000,000 which is included in other receivables (note 20).

Balance as at 1 July 2017
Additions during the year
Reversed during the year

Balance as at 30 June 2018

24. SHARE CAPITAL 
The Company had the following share capital at the reporting dates:

Allotted, called up and fully paid:
Ordinary shares of £0.003 each

Total 
£’000

–
2,100
(891)

1,209

30 June 2018

30 June 2017

Number

£

Number

£

82,095,346

246,286

82,095,346

246,286

The ordinary shares carry the right to vote and rank pari passu for dividends.

The share premium account arises from the excess paid over the nominal value of the shares issued.

During the year, the Group’s EBT purchased Group shares in relation to non-dilutive share awards (note 7). The shares held are measured at cost. 

Opening balance at 1 July 2017
Acquisition of shares by the EBT
Disposal of shares in respect of award vesting

Balance as at 30 June 2018

25. OTHER RESERVES

Available-for-sale reserve (including deferred tax)
Foreign exchange reserve
Capital redemption reserve
Merger reserve
Capital contribution reserve

£’000

4,766
1,665
(1,450)

4,981

30 June 
2017
£’000

1
380
84
44,433
4,442

49,340

30 June 
2018
£’000

13
400
84
44,433
4,442

49,372

The available-for-sale reserve represents the unrealised fair value movements in available-for-sale financial assets (note 18). On disposal the 
cumulative fair value changes in reserves are reclassified to the income statement.

The foreign exchange reserve represents the cumulative foreign exchange differences arising on US Dollar denominated businesses in the Group as 
well as currency differences on goodwill and fair value adjustments on the acquisition of foreign subsidiaries, as listed in note 28. On disposal of the 
US Dollar denominated business, the associated cumulative foreign exchange differences are recycled through the consolidated income statement.

The capital contribution reserve arose from forgiveness of a dividend by the Group’s then parent, PSG (£3,867,000) and from an historical 
acquisition whereby the Group’s then parent, PSG, settled part of the consideration in its own shares (£575,000).

The merger reserve arose on the acquisition of RAMAM in March 2014.

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

87

26. OPERATING LEASES
Office facilities are leased under operating leases. The rental cost is charged to the consolidated income statement on a straight-line basis over the 
lease term. Rent rebates are accounted for over the period of the lease term. 

The future aggregate minimum lease payments under all non-cancellable operating leases, net of rent rebates are as follows:

No later than one year
Later than one year and no later than five years
Later than five years

27. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
Related parties to the Group are:

–  Key management personnel;

–  PSG who hold 38.1% of the issued share capital of the Group; and

30 June 
2018
£’000

1,268
3,099
352

4,719

30 June 
2017
£’000

724
2,426
513

3,663

–  Pacific Investments Management Limited, its subsidiary undertakings and controlling shareholder Sir John Beckwith (collectively ‘Pacific 

Investments’) were considered to be related parties as they held significant influence over the Group by virtue of holding more than 10% of the 
issued share capital of the Group. Following a disposal by Pacific Investments in March 2017, they now hold less than 10% and are, therefore, no 
longer considered a related party. 

Significant transactions with Pacific Investments
There were no significant transactions with Pacific Investments during the prior year.

Significant transactions with PSG

Administrative charges from PSG:
Office facilities
Technology and communications

Total administrative charges 

Receivables and payables with related parties

Amount due to related party:
PSG

Total 

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

1,010
–

1,010

931
470

1,401

30 June
2018
£’000

30 June
2017
£’000

(11)

(11)

(224)

(224)

The Group entered into a non-cancellable operating lease on 26 June 2014 with PSG for the Group’s primary office facilities in London until 
December 2021. 

28. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised in the Group’s consolidated statement of financial position when the Group becomes party  
to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Financial assets are de-recognised when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial 
asset expire or when the contractual rights to those assets are transferred. Financial liabilities are de-recognised when the obligation specified in 
the contract is discharged, cancelled or expires.

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL)
Financial assets are classified as FVTPL when the asset is a trading instrument, or by designation if not. A financial asset may be designated as 
FVTPL upon initial recognition if:

–  such designation eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency that would otherwise arise; or

–  the financial asset forms part of a group of financial assets or financial liabilities or both, which is managed and its performance is evaluated  
on a fair value basis, in accordance with the Group’s documented risk management strategy, and information about the grouping is provided 
internally on that basis.

Financial assets at FVTPL are stated at fair value, with any gains or losses arising on re-measurement recognised in profit or loss. 

88 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

28. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued
Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method 
less provision for impairment. Interest income is recognised by applying the effective interest rate, except for short-term trade and other 
receivables when the recognition of interest would be immaterial.

Impairment provisions are recognised when there is objective evidence (such as significant financial difficulties on the part of the counterparty or 
default or significant delay in payment) that the Group will be unable to collect all of the amounts due. For trade and other receivables, which are 
reported net, such provisions are recorded in a separate account with the loss being recognised in the consolidated income statement. On confirmation 
that the trade and other receivables will not be collectable, the gross carrying value of the asset is written off against the associated provision.

Cash and cash equivalent balances
Cash and cash equivalents balances comprise cash in hand, cash at agents, demand deposits, and other short-term highly liquid investments that 
have maturities of three months or less from inception, are readily convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant risk of 
changes in value.

Available-for-sale financial assets
Available-for-sale financial assets are non-derivatives that are either designated in this category or not classified in any of the other categories. 

Available-for-sale investments are held at fair value if this can be reliably measured. If the investments are not quoted in an active market and their 
fair value cannot be reliably measured, the available-for-sale investment is carried at cost, less accumulated impairment. Unless the valuation falls 
below its original cost, gains and losses arising from changes in fair value of available-for-sale assets are recognised directly in equity through other 
comprehensive income. On disposal the cumulative net gain or loss is transferred to the statement of comprehensive income. Valuations below 
cost are recognised as impairment losses in the income statement. Dividends are recognised in the income statement when the right to receive 
payment is established.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are initially measured at their fair value and are subsequently measured at their amortised cost using the effective interest 
method. Interest expense is recognised by applying the effective interest rate, except for short-term trade and other payables when the recognition 
of interest would be immaterial.

Categories of financial instruments
Financial instruments held by the Group are categorised under IAS 39 as follows:

Financial assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Investment management balances 
Fee receivables
Other receivables

Total loan and receivables

Available-for-sale investments

Total available-for-sale 

Total financial assets

Other receivables exclude prepayments.

Financial liabilities
Investment management balances
Trade and other payables

Total other liabilities at amortised cost

Total financial liabilities

Trade and other payables exclude deferred income.

30 June
 2018
 £’000

30 June
2017
£’000

24,029
13,116
7,856
 18,404

30,759
62,138
5,619
13,818

63,405

112,334

5,165

5,165

12

12

68,570

112,346

30 June
 2018
 £’000

30 June
2017
£’000

 13,147
 22,336

 35,483

 35,483

60,317
17,439

77,756

77,756

The Directors consider the carrying amounts of the loan and receivables financial assets and financial liabilities carried at amortised cost to be a 
reasonable approximation to their fair values due to the short-term nature of the instruments.

Financial risk management
The risks of the business are measured and monitored in accordance with the Board’s risk appetite and policies and procedures covering specific 
risk areas, such as: credit, market and liquidity risk.

The Group is exposed to credit risk, market risk (including interest rate and foreign currency risks) and liquidity risks from the financial instruments 
identified above. This note describes the objectives, policies and processes of the Group for managing those risks and the methods used to  
measure them. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financials

89

28. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued
Credit risk management
Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty defaults on their contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Group. The carrying 
amount of loans and receivables recorded in the financial statements represents the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk. The Group holds no 
collateral as security against any financial asset. Credit risk arises principally from the Group’s fee receivables, investment management balances, 
other receivables and cash balances. The Group manages its credit risk through monitoring the aging of receivables and the credit quality of the 
counterparties with which it does business. 

The aging of outstanding fee receivables at the reporting date is given in note 19. The Group had no single fee receivable balance at year end that is 
material to the Group (2017: none).

The banks with whom the Group deposits cash and cash equivalent balances are monitored, including their credit ratings (note 16).

The Group bears risk in relation to the investment management balances held in respect of the River and Mercantile Funds ICVC. If any debtor 
failed to pay, the Group would redeem the underlying fund units in respect of that debtor, however, it would be subject to risk that the value of the 
underlying fund units had fallen. The maximum theoretical risk exposure is the full £13.1m (2017: £62.1m) value of the receivables multiplied by the 
percentage decrease in the underlying ICVC position during the period between default and redemption. In order to mitigate the risk of losses 
arising from late receipt, the Group will seek specific indemnity from counterparties in certain cases. Management monitor the performance and 
aging of the investment management positions and take recovery action as appropriate.

Market risk – foreign currency risk management
The Group has foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities primarily arising from the US business (including intra-Group balances) and is 
therefore exposed to exchange rate fluctuations on these balances. The carrying amount of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary 
assets and liabilities are shown below in GBP:

Fee receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Payables
Other assets
Available for sale assets

Total

30 June 
2018
£’000

479
820
(2,973)
1,564
5,046

4,936

30 June 
2017
£’000

643
615
(868)
–
–

390

A 10% fluctuation in the exchange rate between foreign currencies and UK Pounds sterling on the outstanding foreign currency denominated 
monetary items at year end balances would result in a gain or loss of £494,000 (2017: £39,000). 

The majority of the Group’s other foreign currency exposure is with its US based subsidiary River and Mercantile LLC. As at 30 June 2018, River and 
Mercantile LLC had net assets of $1,685,000 (2017: $1,895,000) thus any future fluctuations in the exchange rate will have a limited impact on the 
Group and are therefore considered a low risk.

Foreign exchange risk arising from transactions denominated in foreign currencies are monitored and where appropriate the currency required to 
settle the transaction may be purchased ahead of the settlement date.

Market risk – interest rate risk management
The Group has minimal exposure to interest rate risk. The Group has no external borrowings, cash deposits with banks earn a floating rate of 
interest and the interest income is not significant in either year. 

Liquidity risk management
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. This risk relates to the Group’s prudent 
liquidity risk management and implies maintaining sufficient cash reserves to meet the Group’s working capital requirements. Management 
monitors forecasts of the Group’s liquidity, and cash and cash equivalents on the basis of expected cash flow. 

The Group is cash generative before the payment of dividends, and has cash and cash equivalent balances that support the Group’s working capital 
requirements. The fee receivable invoicing cycle is generally quarterly; as a result working capital balances are maintained to meet the ongoing 
expenses of the business during the quarterly cycles. The Group’s capital expenditure requirements have not been significant and have been limited 
to office and IT equipment. 

Prior to significant cash outflows (or entering into commitments which would result in significant cash outflows), including dividends, the Group 
undertakes liquidity and capital analysis.

The Group has entered into operating leases over its premises. Note 26 discloses the future aggregate minimum lease payments at the balance 
sheet date, net of rebates over the life of the contracts.

At 30 June 2018 the Group had cash and cash equivalents of £24.0m (2017: £30.8m).

As ACD of River and Mercantile Funds ICVC (the Fund), some of the operating cash balance of RAMAM is held in an ACD operating account into 
which the management fees from the ICVC are paid on a monthly basis. Of the ACD operating account balance at each year end, the proportion not 
attributable to client fund transactions can be utilised by RAMAM within a 24-hour notice period and thus the account is considered liquid. At 
30 June 2018, £2.8m (2017: £1.1m) of the cash and cash equivalents balance related to the ACD account. 

90 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

28. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued
Liquidity gap analysis
The table below presents the cash flows receivable and payable by the Group under non-derivative financial assets and liabilities by remaining 
contractual maturities at the reporting date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual, undiscounted cash flows.

The net liquidity positions in the table below relate to cash flows on contractual obligations existing at the reporting date and does not take account 
of any cash flows generated from profits on normal trading activities.

As at 30 June 2018
Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Investment management balances
Fee income receivables
Other receivables

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Investment management balances
Trade and other payables

Total financial liabilities

Net liquidity surplus/(deficit)

As at 30 June 2017
Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Investment management balances
Fee income receivables
Other receivables

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Investment management balances
Trade and other payables

Total financial liabilities

Net liquidity surplus

On demand 
£’000

< 3 months 
£’000

3-12 months 
£’000

> 12 months 
£’000

24,030
–
–
–

24,030

–
–

–

24,030

–
13,116
7,856
18,374

39,346

13,147
19,266

32,413

6,933

–
–
–
30

30

–
80

80

–
–
–
–

–

–
2,990

2,990

(50)

(2,990)

On demand 
£’000

< 3 months 
£’000

3-12 months 
£’000

>12 months 
£’000

30,759
–
–
–

30,759

–
–

–

30,759

–
62,138
5,249
13,818

81,205

60,317
17,439

77,756

3,449

–
–
370
–

370

–
–

–

370

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–

Capital management
The Group operates its subsidiaries as self-sufficient entities, which are expected to be able to meet their funding requirements without recourse  
to the parent.

The Group’s capital structure consists of equity (share capital and share premium), other reserves and its retained earnings; capital is managed on  
a consolidated and individual entity basis to ensure that each entity is able to continue as a going concern. Three of the Group’s subsidiaries are 
regulated entities (one in the UK, one in the US, and one in both the UK and the US). The Group scrutinises its capital adequacy using the Pillar 2 
and ICAAP frameworks which are regulated by the FCA to maintain adequate capital requirements. The Group has complied with its regulatory 
capital required throughout the period covered by these financial statements. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

91

29. ULTIMATE CONTROLLING PARTY AND SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
The Group became publicly listed on 26 June 2014 and remains publicly listed. 

Subsidiary undertakings
The following subsidiaries have been included in the consolidated financial information of the Group:

Name

River and Mercantile Investments Limited1 

P-Solve Holdings Limited1

River and Mercantile LLC1,2

River and Mercantile Holdings Limited 

River and Mercantile Asset Management LLP¹

River and Mercantile Group Services Limited¹,2

River and Mercantile Group Trustees Limited¹,2

River and Mercantile Group Employee Benefit Trust

Country of 
incorporation 
of registration

UK

UK

US

UK

UK

UK

UK

UK

Proportion of 
voting rights/
ordinary share 
capital held %

100/100

100/100

100/100

100/100

100/100

100/100

100/100

0/0

Registered office address

Nature of business

30 Coleman St,  
London, EC2R 5AL
30 Coleman St,  
London, EC2R 5AL
130 Turner St, Waltham,  
MA 02453 
30 Coleman St,  
London, EC2R 5AL
30 Coleman St,  
London, EC2R 5AL
30 Coleman St,  
London, EC2R 5AL
30 Coleman St,  
London, EC2R 5AL
Heritage Hall, Le Marchant 
Street, St Peter Port,  
Guernsey, GY1 4HY

Investment management

Holding company for the  
US business
Actuarial and consulting

Holding company

Investment management

Dormant service company

Dormant service company

Employee Benefit Trust

1. Indirect holding.
2. Exempt from audit requirements.

River and Mercantile Asset Management LLP has reporting years ending 31 March on a standalone basis. This was the existing year-end date as at 
acquisition and no change is expected.

92

River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

30. NEW STANDARDS AND INTERPRETATIONS
There have been no new standards having a material impact on the financial statements for the year. 

The following standards and amendments to existing standards have been published and are mandatory from the financial period beginning on or 
after the effective dates shown below but are not currently relevant to the Group (although they may affect the accounting for future transactions 
and events).

Topic

Key requirements

IFRS 9 Financial 
Instruments

IFRS 9 addresses the classification, measurement and derecognition of financial assets 
and financial liabilities, introduces new rules for hedge accounting and a new impairment 
model for financial assets.

Effective date

1 January 2018

Annual improvements to 
IFRSs (2014-2016 Cycle)

IFRS 1 has been amended to remove short-term exemptions dealing with IFRS 7 Financial 
Instruments: Disclosures, IAS 19 Employee Benefits and IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial 
Statements.

1 January 2017 and 
1 January 2018

IFRS12 Disclosure of interests in Other Entities – Amendments have been made to clarify 
the scope of IFRS 12 in respect of interests in entities within the scope of IFRS 5 Non-
current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations.

IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures. Clarified that the election to 
measure at fair value through profit or loss an investment in an associate or joint venture 
that is held by an entity that is a venture capital organisation, or other qualifying entity,  
is available for each investment in an associate or joint venture or an investment-by-
investment basis, upon initial recognition.

IFRIC 22 Foreign Currency 
Translations and Advance 
Consideration

IFRIC 22 addresses how to determine the date of the transaction for the purpose of 
determining the exchange rate to use on an initial recognition of the related asset, 
expense or income (or part of it) on the de-recognition of a non-monetary asset or 
non-monetary liability arising from the payment or receipt of advance consideration  
in a foreign currency (e.g. a prepayment or deferred income).

1 January 2018

IFRS 16 Leases

Under IFRS 16, all lease contracts are accounted for more in line with the previous finance 
lease approach where lessees have to recognise a lease liability reflecting future lease 
payments and a ‘right-of-use asset’ for almost all lease contracts.

1 January 2019

In the income statement lessees will have to present interest expense on the lease 
liability and depreciation on the right-of-use asset. In the cash flow statement the part  
of the lease payments that reflects interest on the lease liability can be presented as an 
operating cash flow (if it is the entity’s policy to present interest payments as operating 
cash flows). Cash payments for the principal portion of the lease liability are classified 
within financing activities. Payments for short-term leases, for leases of low-value assets 
and variable lease payments not included in the measurement of the lease liability are 
presented within operating activities.

IFRS 15 Revenue 
recognition

IFRS 15 replaces the outgoing IAS 18 with the objective of establishing the principles that 
an entity shall apply to report information to users of financial statements about the 
nature, amounts, timing and uncertainty of revenue and cash flow arising from a contract 
with a client. The introduction of IFRS 15 is to close the gap between IFRS and US GAAP.

1 January 2018

The Directors have assessed the impact that the adoption of these standards and interpretations will have on future periods and have concluded 
that the following material changes will arise:

–  IFRS 16 will lead to an increase in non-current assets to reflect lease right-of-use assets and in increase in liabilities to reflect future lease 

payments; and

–  IFRS 9 will lead to the Group’s available-for-sale investments being reclassified as fair value through profit or loss.

31. EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING DATE
Since the end of the financial year, the Directors are not aware of any other matter or circumstance not otherwise dealt with in this report or the 
financial statements that has significantly or will significantly affect the operations of the Group, the results of those operations or the state of 
affairs of the Group. 

A second interim dividend in respect of the year of 5.5 pence per share has been declared, of which 1.3 pence is a special dividend relating to net 
performance fees. The Directors have proposed a final dividend in respect of the year of 5.5 pence per share, of which 2.3 pence is a special dividend 
relating to net performance fees.

COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

93

Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other receivables
Deferred tax asset
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Investments

Total assets

Liabilities
Payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Other reserves
Retained earnings

Equity attributable to owners

The Company’s profit for the year was £11,990,000 (2017: £7,461,000).

COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES  
IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Balance as at 30 June 2016
Comprehensive income for the year:
Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year
Transactions with owners:
Dividends
Share-based payment expense
Deferred tax on share-based payment expense 

Total transactions with owners:

Balance as at 30 June 2017

Comprehensive income for the year
Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners
Dividends
Share-based payment expense
Disposal of EBT shares
Deferred tax on share-based payment expense 

Total transactions with owners

Balance as at 30 June 2018

Note

30 June 
2018
£’000

30 June 
2017
£’000

2
3
4
5
6
7

8

9
10
11

7,815
11,053
2,074
246
47
57,645

15,182
5,663
2,629
19
79
56,941

78,880 

80,513 

7,902

7,902

5,980

5,980

70,978

74,533

246
14,688
48,384
7,660

70,978

246
14,688
48,384
11,215

74,533

Share 
capital
£’000

246

Share 
premium
£’000

14,688

Other 
reserves
£’000

48,384

Retained 
earnings
£’000

Total
£’000

9,097

72,415

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–

–

7,461

7,461

(9,345)
2,039
1,963

(5,343)

7,461

7,461

(9,345)
2,039
1,963

(5,343)

246

14,688

48,384

11,215

74,533

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

11,990

11,990

11,990

11,990

(17,456)
2,360
95
(544)

(17,456)
2,360
95
(544)

(15,545)

(15,545)

246

14,688

48,384

7,660

70,978

94 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

COMPANY STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

Cash flow from operating activities
Loss before interest, tax and dividends from subsidiaries

Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation of intangible assets
EBT funding
Share-based payment expense

Operating cash flow before movement in working capital
(Increase)/decrease in operating assets
Increase in operating liabilities

Cash (used in)/generated from operations
Taxation (paid)/received

Net cash (used in)/generated from operations

Cash flow from investing activities
Purchase of intangible assets
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Interest received/(paid)
Dividends received from subsidiaries

Net cash generated from investing activities

Cash flow from financing activities
EBT funding settled
EBT disposal of shares
Dividends paid

Net cash used in financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

(9,061)

(9,696)

80
37
1,773
1,657

(5,514)
(5,435)
1,539

(9,410)
(92)

(9,502)

20
–
3,582
856

(5,238)
4,171
4,281

3,214
788

4,002

–
(307)
31
21,500

(79)
(2)
(7)
16,550

21,224

16,462

(1,728)
95
(17,456)

(3,570)
–
(9,345)

(19,089)

(12,915)

(7,367)

7,549

15,182

7,633

7,815

15,182

 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

95

1. BASIS OF PREPARATION
The Company’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, International Accounting 
Standards and interpretations, International Financial Reporting Interpretation Committee interpretations, and with those parts of the 2006 Act 
applicable to companies reporting under IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board as adopted by the European Union (IFRS) 
that are relevant to its operations and effective for accounting periods beginning on 1 July 2017.

Principal place of business
The Company’s principal place of business is the same as its registered office.

Result for the year
The profit after tax for the year ended 30 June 2018 was £11,990,000 (2017: £7,461,000). This includes a charge of £1,773,000 relating to funding 
provided to the Group’s EBT (2017: £3,582,000).

In accordance with s408 of the Companies Act 2006 a separate income statement has not been presented for the Company. There are no items of 
comprehensive income other than the result for the year and, therefore, no statement of comprehensive income has been prepared for the Company.

Foreign currencies
To the extent that the Company undertakes transactions in currencies other than GBP, the transactions are translated into GBP using the exchange 
rate prevailing at the date of the transaction. Balances denominated in foreign currencies are translated into GBP using the exchange rate prevailing at 
the balance sheet date. All foreign exchange differences arising from the settlement of transactions or the translation of balances are recognised in the 
income statement.

Employees
The Company had an average of 34 employees during the year (2017: 16). Total remuneration costs were £10,100,000 (2017: £8,060,000). 

Dividends
See note 15 of the consolidated financial statements.

2. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and at bank, cash at agents, demand deposits, and other short-term highly liquid investments 
that have maturities of three months or less from inception, are readily convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant 
risk of changes in value. Below is a table detailing the credit rating of the banks with which the Company holds its cash and the balance held at 
year-end.

Bank

Barclays Bank 

3. OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Taxes and social security
Prepayments and accrued income
Amounts owed from Group undertakings
Other debtors

£’000

Credit rating

Rating body

7,815 A2/Stable

Moody’s

30 June 
2018
£’000

226
552
10,223
52

11,053

30 June
 2017
£’000

202
336
5,029
96

5,663

Amounts owed from Group undertakings represent balances incurred in the course of trade and are payable on demand.

96 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

4. TAX
The Company’s accounting policy in respect of tax is the same as that of the Group as detailed in note 13 of the consolidated financial statements.

Current tax on profits for the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total current tax
Deferred tax on origination and reversal of timing differences

Total tax charge/(credit)

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

28
444

472
13

485

(332)
–

(332)
(229)

(561)

The tax assessed for the year is lower (2017: lower) than the average standard rate of corporation tax in the UK. The differences are explained below: 

Profit before tax
Profit before tax multiplied by the average rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% (2017: 19.75%)
Effects of:
Income not assessable to tax
Group relief
Other timing differences 
Adjustment in respect of prior years

Total tax credit

Deferred tax assets:
At beginning of year
(Charge)/credit to the income statement – share-based payment expense
(Charge)/credit to equity – share-based payment expense

At year end

5. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Property, plant and equipment is carried at historical cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation charges the cost of the assets to the 
consolidated income statement over their expected useful lives.

Cost:
At 30 June 2017
Additions
Disposals

At 30 June 2018

Accumulated depreciation:
At 30 June 2017
Disposals
Depreciation charge

At 30 June 2018

Net book value:
At 30 June 2017

At 30 June 2018

Office 
equipment
£’000

Leasehold 
improvements
£’000

–
73
–

73

–
–
10

10

–

63

42
234
(33)

243

23
(33)
70

60

19

183

Year ended 
30 June 
2018
£’000

12,013
2,282

Year ended 
30 June 
2017
£’000

10,381
2,050

(4,085)
1,802
42
444

485

30 June 
2018
£’000

2,629
(11)
(544)

2,074

(3,268)
1,218
(561)
–

(561)

30 June 
2017
£’000

437
229
1,963

2,629

Total
£’000

42
307
(33)

316

23
(33)
80

70

19

246

Strategic report

Governance

Financials

97

6. INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Intangible assets are carried at historical cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment. Amortisation charges the cost of the assets to the 
consolidated income statement over their expected useful lives.

Cost:
At 30 June 2017
Exchange difference

At 30 June 2018

Accumulated amortisation and impairment:
At 30 June 2017
Amortisation charge

At 30 June 2018

Net book value:
At 30 June 2017

At 30 June 2018

7. INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES 

At start of year
Additions – share-based payments in subsidiaries

At end of year

The Company’s investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less provision for any impairment incurred.

8. PAYABLES

Taxes and social security
Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income

Software
£’000

Total
£’000

79
5

84

–
37

37

79

47

79
5

84

–
37

37

79

47

30 June 
2018
£’000

56,941
704

57,645

30 June 
2017
£’000

55,756
1,185

56,941

30 June 
2018
£’000

329
715
555
6,303

7,902

30 June 
2017
£’000

–
–
636
5,344

5,980

Amounts owed to Group undertakings represent balances incurred in the course of trade and are payable on demand.

9. SHARE CAPITAL
Full details of the Company’s share capital can be found in note 24 of the consolidated financial statements.

10. SHARE PREMIUM
Full details of any movements in share premium can be found in the Company statement of changes in equity.

11. OTHER RESERVES
A reconciliation of the movements in reserves can be found in the Company statement of changes in equity. Details on the nature of the other 
reserves in the Company can be found in note 25 of the consolidated financial statements. 

A breakdown of other reserves is detailed below.

Merger reserve
Capital contribution reserve
Capital redemption reserve

As at 30 June 2018, the Company had £11,527,000 of distributable reserves (2017: £15,082,000).

30 June 
2018
£’000

44,433
3,867
84

48,384

30 June 
2017
£’000

44,433
3,867
84

48,384

98 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

12. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
A discussion of the financial risks and associated financial risk management, which applies to all of the companies in the Group, can be found in  
note 28 of the consolidated financial statements, along with the Group’s accounting policy in respect of financial instruments

The financial assets and liabilities of the Company are categorised under IAS 39 as follows: 

Financial assets classified as loans and receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Other receivables

Total financial assets

Other receivables exclude prepayments and accrued income.

Financial liabilities held at amortised cost
Payables

Total financial liabilities

Payables exclude accruals and deferred income.

30 June
2018
 £’000

30 June
2017
£’000

7,815
 10,501

18,316

15,182
3,133

18,315

30 June
2018
 £’000

 1,599

 1,599

30 June
2017
£’000

636

636

Credit risk management
Credit risk refers to the risk that counterparty defaults on their contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Company. The carrying amount 
of loans and receivables recorded in the financial statements represents the Company’s maximum exposure to credit risk. The Company held no 
collateral as security against any financial asset. Credit risk arises principally from the Company’s intercompany and cash balances. The Company 
manages its credit risk through monitoring the credit quality of the counterparties with which cash is held and the Company’s subsidiaries resources. 

The banks with whom the Company deposits cash and cash equivalent balances are monitored, including their credit ratings (note 2).

Market risk – interest rate risk management
The Company has minimal exposure to interest rate risk. The Company has no external borrowings and cash deposits with banks earn a floating 
rate of interest. Interest income is not significant in either year. 

Liquidity gap analysis
The table below presents the cash flows receivable and payable by the Company under non-derivative financial assets and liabilities by remaining 
contractual maturities at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual, undiscounted cash flows.

The net liquidity positions in the table below relate to cash flows on contractual obligations existing at the balance sheet date and do not take 
account of any cash flows generated from profits on normal trading activities. 

As at 30 June 2018
Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other receivables

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Payables

Total financial liabilities

Net liquidity surplus

As at 30 June 2017
Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other receivables

Total financial assets

Liabilities
Payables

Total financial liabilities

Net liquidity surplus

Other receivables exclude prepayments and payables exclude deferred income.

On demand 
£’000

< 3 months 
£’000

3-12 months 
£’000

7,815
–

7,815

–

–

7,815

–
10,501

10,501

7,521

7,521

2,980

–
–

–

381

381

(381)

On demand 
£’000

< 3 months 
£’000

3-12 months 
£’000

15,182
3,133

18,315

636

636

17,679

–
–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

 
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financials

99

13. DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION
Details of the individual Director’s remuneration can be found in the Directors’ Remuneration report starting on page 50.

14. RELATED PARTIES
Details of related party transactions can be found in note 27 of the consolidated financial statements.

15. OTHER INFORMATION
The Company has taken the exemption under s408(2) of the Companies Act 2006 to not present their remuneration separately in these financial 
statements.

A second interim dividend in respect of the year of 5.5 pence per share has been declared, of which 1.3 pence is a special dividend relating to net 
performance fees. The Directors have proposed a final dividend in respect of the year of 5.5 pence per share, of which 2.3 pence is a special dividend 
relating to net performance fees. 

The Company has not entered into any significant commitments or contingent liabilities after the balance sheet date. 

100 River and Mercantile Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2018

GLOSSARY

ABI – Association of British Insurers

ETF – Exchange traded fund

ACD – Authorised corporate director

FCA – Financial Conduct Authority

AGM – Annual General Meeting

FRC – Financial Reporting Council

NUM – Notional under management. This 
is the contract or billing notional amount 
of a contract in the Derivatives Solutions 
division and is analogous to AUM.

AUA – Assets under advice

GDPR – General Data Protection Regulation

AUM – Assets under management

IAA – Investment advisory agreement

Buy-in – Process by which trustees of a 
pension scheme buy an insurance policy 
to cover a group of their members. The 
Trustees hold the policy as an asset and 
remain responsible for paying the pensions.

Buyout – A type of financial transfer 
whereby a pension fund sponsor pays a 
fixed amount in order to free itself of any 
liabilities (and assets) relating to that fund.

CAGR – Compound annual growth rate

CGU – Cash generating unit

CIO – Chief Investment Officer

CMA – Competition and Markets Authority

CSAM – Credit Suisse Asset Management

DAA – Dynamic asset allocation

DB – Defined benefit

DC – Defined contribution

DEP – Deferred equity plan

EBT – Employee Benefit Trust

EM – Emerging markets

EMAR – Emerging Market Absolute Return

EMIR – European Market 
Infrastructure Regulation

EPS – Earnings per share

EPSP – Executive performance share 
plan. A dilutive share plan awarded to 
Executives during the Group’s IPO.

ESG – Environmental, social, governance

ESMA – European Securities 
and Market Authority

ICAAP – Internal capital adequacy 
assessment process

ICVC – Investment company of variable capital

IFA – Independent financial advisor

ILC – Industrial life cycle

IMA – Investment management agreement

IME – Investment Management Entities

IPO – Initial public offering

KPI – Key performance indicator

LDI – Liability-driven investment, an 
investment strategy based on the cash 
flows needed to fund future liabilities.

LGPS – Local government pension scheme

PPF – Pension Protection Fund, a 
statutory fund established under the 
provisions of the Pensions Act 2004.

PSG – Punter Southall Group Limited

PSP – Performance share plan

PVT – Potential, value and timing. The 
investment strategy employed by the 
Group’s Equity Solutions division.

RAMAM – River and Mercantile 
Asset Management LLP

Redemptions in transition – Redemptions 
which have been notified by the client 
at the period-end date, but where the 
AUM/NUM is included in fee earning 
assets at period end. The redemptions 
will be included in a future period.

RMMIC – River and Mercantile Micro 
Cap Investment Company

LTIP – Long-term incentive plan

RWAA – Risk weighted asset attribution

Mandated AUM/NUM – Represent the 
Group’s closing AUM/NUM, adjusted for any 
mandates or redemptions in transition. 

SIPP – Self-invested pension plan

TIGS – Total Investment Governance Solution

Mandates in transition – Represent 
the AUM/NUM of mandates which have 
been awarded by clients at the period-
end date and will transition into fee 
earning assets. The timing, and ultimate 
amount transitioned is determined by 
the client. We report an estimated AUM/
NUM for those mandates where there 
is a high likelihood of the amount being 
transitioned within the next three months. 

TSA – Transitional service agreement

TSR – Total shareholder return

UCITS – Undertakings for the collective 
investment of transferable securities

VWAP – Volume-weighted average price

WACC – Weighted average cost of capital

YoY – Year-on-year

MiFIR – Markets in Financial 
Investments Regulation

MiFID – Markets in Financial 
Instruments Directive

NAV – Net asset value

SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION AND ADVISORS

COMPANY NUMBER
04035248

REGISTERED OFFICE
30 Coleman Street 
London 
EC2R 5AL

Tel: 020 3327 5100

COMPANY SECRETARY
Sally Buckmaster

WEBSITE
www.riverandmercantile.com

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
5 December 2018 at 9am  
88 Wood Street 
London 
EC2V 7QR

DIVIDENDS
Where possible, it is recommended that 
dividend payments are made directly into a 
bank account to provide improved security 
and faster access to funds. You may give 
instruction via the Registrar’s website 
www.shareview.co.uk or in writing.

FINAL DIVIDEND FOR THE FINANCIAL 
YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2018
Amount
5.5 pence per ordinary share

Ex-dividend date
22 November 2018

Record date
23 November 2018

Payment date
14 December 2018

REGISTRARS
Equiniti Limited 
Aspect House  
Spencer Road  
Lancing 
West Sussex  
BN99 6DA

SHAREHOLDER HELPLINE
0371 384 2030  
(+44 121 415 7047) 
www.shareview.co.uk

AUDITORS
BDO LLP
55 Baker Street  
London 
W1U 7EU

CORPORATE BROKER AND ADVISOR
Numis Securities Limited
The London Stock Exchange Building  
10 Paternoster Square 
London 
EC4M 7LT

Canaccord Genuity Limited
88 Wood Street 
London 
EC2V 7QR

SHARE LISTING
River and Mercantile Group PLC‘s ordinary 
shares of £0.003 are admitted to trading 
on the Main Market of the London 
Stock Exchange under ticker RIV.

Information on the share price and the 
Company can be accessed via the Company’s 
website or at www.londonstockexchange.com.

BLOOMBERG
0994474D:LN

ISIN
GB00BLZH7X42

SEDOL CODE
BLZH7X4

TICKER
RIV

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

8